0% found this document useful (0 votes)

4 views497 pages

Phys Paper 2

This document contains examination details for the Pearson Edexcel International GCSE Physics paper scheduled for January 17, 2019. It includes instructions for candidates, useful equations, and a series of questions related to physics concepts such as orbits, vector quantities, and energy calculations. The total marks for the paper are 60, and candidates are advised to show all calculations and check their answers.

Uploaded by

oaksoeaunb

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

4 views497 pages

Phys Paper 2

Uploaded by

oaksoeaunb

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information

Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE

Thursday 17 January 2019

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour) Paper Reference 4PH0/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH0
Paper: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 60.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Try toyour
Write answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.

Turn over

P61937RA
©2019 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1/1/1/
*P61937RA0120*
EQUATIONS

You may find the following equations useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p2 × V2

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t

2π × orbital radius 2× π× r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum
force =
time taken

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m / s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P61937RA0220*
Answer ALL questions.
1 Planets and moons in the Solar System move in orbits.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Name the force that causes planets and moons to move in orbits.
(1)

.................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows the orbits of a planet and a moon in the Solar System.
The diagram is not to scale.

....................... . . . . . . . .

...............................
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................... . . . . . . . . . . . .

(i) On the diagram, label the planet, the moon and the Sun.
(2)
(ii) Explain how the time period of the moon’s orbit is different to the time period of the
planet’s orbit.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
*P61937RA0320* Turn over
2 (a) Describe what is meant by the term vector quantity.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(b) Complete the table by ticking (3) the correct boxes to show whether each quantity
is a scalar or a vector.
The first one has been done for you.
(3)

Quantity Scalar Vector

energy 3

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
speed

weight

acceleration

charge

moment
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 2 = 5 marks)

4
*P61937RA0420*
3 The diagram shows part of a roller coaster ride.
The car is pulled towards point A and then released.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

car
A
start

B
D
C

(a) Choose letters from the diagram to complete this sentence.

(2)
The car experiences the greatest downwards acceleration at point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

and it has the most kinetic energy at point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The maximum gravitational potential energy of the car is 380 kJ.
The maximum height of the car is 45 m.
Calculate the mass of the car.
[gravitational potential energy = mass × g × height]
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mass = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg

(Total for Question 3 = 5 marks)

5
*P61937RA0520* Turn over
4 (a) A copper cube has a mass of 0.0717 kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of this copper cube.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Give the unit.
(2)

weight = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(ii) State the equation linking density, mass and volume.
(1)

(iii) The density of copper in this cube is 8960 kg/m3.

Calculate the volume of this copper cube.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(2)

volume = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m3

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P61937RA0620*
(b) The graph shows the masses of some materials when their volume is 1 m3.

9000
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8000

7000

6000

Mass of 1 m3 5000
in kg
4000

3000

2000

1000
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0
water plastic aluminium granite steel brass
Material

(i) State the type of graph shown.

(1)

(ii) Use information from the graph to compare the densities of granite and steel.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 4 = 8 marks)

7
*P61937RA0720* Turn over
5 This question is about sound.
(a) Describe an investigation to measure the speed of sound in air.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.

(6)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
*P61937RA0920* Turn over
(b) The speed of sound changes when the temperature changes.
A student investigates how the speed of sound in air varies with temperature.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The student’s results are shown on the graph.

Speed of sound
in m/s
345

340

335

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
330

325

320
−20 −15 −10 −5 0 5 10 15 20
Temperature in °C

(i) Draw a line of best fit on the graph.

(1)
(ii) Use the graph to find the speed of sound when the air temperature is 20 °C.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

speed of sound = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P61937RA01020*
(iii) A ship moves about in fog.
A foghorn is used to make a loud, low-pitched sound to warn any nearby ships.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The air temperature decreases while the foghorn emits sound waves of a
constant frequency.
Explain how this decrease in temperature affects the wavelength of the
sound waves.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
*P61937RA01120* Turn over
6 An energy company plans to build a new nuclear power station.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using a nuclear power station to

generate electricity.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
advantages ...... ............................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

disadvantages ........................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 4 marks)

12
*P61937RA01220*
7 The photograph shows an electrical appliance plug containing a step-down transformer.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Compare the number of turns on the primary coil of a step-down transformer with
the number of turns on its secondary coil.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
.................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) This transformer is designed to reduce the voltage from 230 V to 5.5 V.
The secondary current is 1.0 A.
(i) State the equation linking primary voltage, primary current, secondary voltage
and secondary current for a transformer.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the primary current in the transformer.

[assume the transformer is 100% efficient]
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

primary current = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

14
*P61937RA01420*
(c) A student notices that the electrical applicance plug becomes warm when the
appliance is working.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Suggest how this will affect the input to the transformer.

[secondary voltage and secondary current do not change]
(2)

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P61937RA01520* Turn over
8 The simplified diagram shows a crane being used to lift a large rock.
The diagram is not to scale.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1.2 m

P counterweight

F 18 kN 150 kN

length of crane arm

8.0 m
rock

(a) The table gives information about the forces acting on the uniform crane arm.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Complete the table by giving the missing information.
(1)

Force Name of force

F weight of rock

150 kN weight of counterweight

18 kN

(b) (i) State the equation linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from the pivot.
(1) DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the clockwise moment of the weight of the counterweight about
the pivot, P.
(2)

moment = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N m
16
*P61937RA01620*
(c) (i) State the principle of moments.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the weight of the rock.

(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

weight = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 8 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

17
*P61937RA01720* Turn over
9 A student investigates the motion of a toy train.
The toy train is released from rest and rolls down the slope.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

toy train

truck

(a) The toy train has a mass of 0.039 kg.

The toy train moves with a velocity of 0.56 m/s when it reaches the bottom of the slope.
(i) State the equation linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(ii) Calculate the momentum of the toy train when it reaches the bottom of the slope.
(1)

momentum = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

18
*P61937RA01820*
(iii) The toy train hits the truck and they stick together.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

toy train truck

The train and truck move away together with a velocity of 0.26 m/s.
Calculate the mass of the truck.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mass = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg

QUESTION 9 CONTINUES ON PAGE 20

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

19
*P61937RA01920* Turn over
(b) The student repeats the investigation using another identical truck connected to
the first truck.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The student releases the toy train from the top of the slope in the same way
as before.
The toy train hits the trucks and they stick together.

toy train trucks

The toy train and trucks move away together.

The student concludes
“The two trucks are identical, so their velocity will be the same as when
there was just one truck.”

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Discuss whether the student’s conclusion is correct or not.
(3)

(Total for Question 9 = 8 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 60 MARKS

20
*P61937RA02020*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2019

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer allthequestions.
Answer
• – there may bequestions in the spaces provided
more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind about
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Write
Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Try toyour answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.

Turn over

*P58374A0120*
P58374A
©2019 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1/1/1/C2
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m / s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P58374A0220*
Answer ALL questions.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1 (a) Which force is responsible for keeping satellites in orbit?

(1)
A electrostatic
B gravitational
C magnetic
D nuclear

(b) Which of these is the largest?

(1)
A galaxy
B planet
C star
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

D universe

(c) Which of these represents the brightness of stars at a standard distance?

(1)
A absolute magnitude
B colour
C diameter
D temperature

(Total for Question 1 = 3 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

3
*P58374A0320* Turn over
2 A student investigates a transformer.
This is the student’s method.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

● use a primary coil with 10 turns
● connect the primary coil to a constant maximum input voltage
● measure the output voltage across the secondary coil
● repeat using an increasing number of turns on the primary coil
The table shows the student’s results.

Number of turns Output voltage

on primary coil in V

10 39.6

20 19.7

40 9.9

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
60 6.6

80 5.0

100 4.0

(a) (i) Plot a graph of the student’s results on the grid.

(1)
(ii) Draw a curve of best fit.
(1)
40

30 DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Output voltage DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

in V 20

0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Number of turns on primary coil

4
*P58374A0420*
(iii) Describe the relationship between the output voltage and the number of
turns on the primary coil.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) State the formula linking input and output voltages and the turns ratio for the
transformer.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The input voltage of the transformer is 6.8 V.

Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

number of turns = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 7 marks)

5
*P58374A0520* Turn over
3 This question is about sound waves.

(a) Describe an experiment to measure the speed of sound in air.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P58374A0620*
(b) An oscilloscope can be used to determine the frequency of a sound wave.
The diagram shows an oscilloscope trace of a sound wave.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Oscilloscope settings

y direction: 1 square = 1 V

x direction: 1 square = 0.25 ms

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Calculate the period of this sound wave.

(3)

period = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . s
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the frequency of this sound wave.

(2)

frequency = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . Hz
(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

7
*P58374A0720* Turn over
4 This is a question about alpha particles.
(a) Describe the nature of an alpha particle.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows the path of an alpha particle as it passes close to a nucleus.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
nucleus

(i) Draw an arrow from point X to show the force on the alpha particle due to the nucleus.
Label this force Y.
(2)
(ii) Draw an arrow to show the force on the nucleus due to the alpha particle.
Label this force Z.
(2)
(iii) Explain how the path of the alpha particle shows whether the nucleus is
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

positive, negative or neutral.
(3)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P58374A0820*
(c) The alpha particle experiences a resultant force of 3.6 N and has a mass of 6.6 × 10–27 kg.
Calculate the acceleration of the alpha particle.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

acceleration = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . m / s 2

(Total for Question 4 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
*P58374A0920* Turn over
5 A toy produces continuous waves when floating on the surface of a pool of water.
The waves spread out as circular wavefronts.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 1 shows the wavefronts produced when the toy is not moving, as viewed
from above.

toy

Diagram 1

Diagram 2 shows the wavefronts produced when the toy is moving across the surface
of the pool of water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
toy
B
A

Diagram 2

(a) Draw an arrow on diagram 2 to show the direction the toy is moving.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P58374A01020*
(b) Explain how the frequency of the waves at point A is different to the frequency of
the waves at point B.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 5 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
*P58374A01120* Turn over
6 A dog sits on a water-filled bag to keep cool.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

water-filled bag

(a) The table shows some data about the dog and the water in the bag.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
mass of water in kg 8.7

power output of dog by heating in W 75

specific heat capacity of water in J/kg °C 4200

initial temperature of water in °C 16

The dog sits on the bag for 22 minutes.

(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the dog to the water by heating
in 22 minutes.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . J
(ii) State an assumption you have made when calculating the energy transferred.
(1)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P58374A01220*
(iii) Calculate the temperature of the water after 22 minutes.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

temperature = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . °C

(b) Discuss why conduction is the main way that thermal energy is transferred from
the dog to the water.
(3)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 11 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P58374A01320* Turn over
7 (a) Give two pieces of evidence for the Big Bang theory.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain how this evidence supports the Big Bang theory.
(4)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

14
*P58374A01420*
8 The diagram shows a bottle supported by a finger.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

force from finger = 2.1 N not to

scale
3.2 cm

28 cm
Z

floor

weight of bottle

(a) State the name of point Z.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from the pivot.
(1)

(ii) The bottle does not move.

Calculate the weight of the bottle.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

weight of bottle = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 8 = 6 marks)

15
*P58374A01520* Turn over
9 This is a question about a melting ice cube.
(a) The diagram shows an ice cube placed on the ground.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

ice cube

ground

(i) The mass of the ice cube is 3.7 g and its area of contact with the ground
is 2.6 × 10–4 m2.
Calculate the pressure the ice cube exerts on the ground.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
pressure = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . Pa

(ii) The ice cube melts and becomes a puddle with a larger cross-sectional area.
Explain how the pressure of the ice cube on the ground changes when it melts.
(2)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P58374A01620*
(b) Ice melts at a temperature of 0 °C.
On the axes, sketch how the temperature of the ice cube changes as it rises from
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

a temperature of –10 °C to a temperature of 20 °C.

(3)

Temperature
in °C

0
Time

–10
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(c) Explain the changes that occur when a solid melts.

Refer to particles in your answer.
(2)

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.. .... .... .... ..................................... ........................ ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 9 = 11 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

17
*P58374A01720*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2019

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball‑point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer allthequestions.
Answer
• – there may bequestions in the spaces provided
more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
• your mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box
about an answer, put a line through the box
. If you change
and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

*P60185A0128*
P60185A
©2019 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P60185A0228*
Answer ALL questions.

1 (a) The diagram shows a fossil fuel power station.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Five stages of electricity generation and transmission are shown.

steam

water

furnace and boiler condenser turbines generator transformer

(i) The power station burns a fossil fuel in the furnace.

Give an example of a fossil fuel.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Which stage of the power station transfers energy from a chemical store to a
thermal store?
(1)
A condenser
B furnace and boiler
C generator
D turbines

(iii) Which stage of the power station transfers energy electrically from a kinetic
energy store?
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)
A condenser
B furnace and boiler
C generator
D turbines

4
*P60185A0428*
(b) Electricity can also be generated by solar farms.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Source: © Zoonar GmbH/Alamy)

Energy is transferred from the Sun to the solar farm by radiation.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The solar farm uses photovoltaic cells to transfer this energy electrically.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of generating electricity using solar farms.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

5
*P60185A0528* Turn over
2 This question is about sound waves.
(a) Sound is an example of a type of wave.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

State the name of this type of wave.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The speed of sound in liquids is greater than the speed of sound in gases.
(i) Describe the arrangement of particles in liquids and in gases.
You may use diagrams to help your answer.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Suggest why the speed of sound in liquids is greater than the speed of sound
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

in gases.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7
*P60185A0728* Turn over
(c) A buzzer is an electrical device that produces sound.
The frequency of sound produced by the buzzer is 1400 Hz.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) State the formula linking speed, frequency and wavelength of a wave.
(1)

(ii) Sound travels at a speed of 340 m/s in air.

Calculate the wavelength of the sound wave from the buzzer.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
wavelength = ........................................ . . . . . . . m

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8
*P60185A0828*
(iii) Two students use this method to investigate sound from a moving source.
Student A connects a piece of string to the buzzer.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

She spins round so that the buzzer moves in a horizontal circular path.
● she spins round at a slow speed
● she then spins round at a high speed
Student B stands several metres away from student A.

student A student B

buzzer

The sound heard by student A is different to the sound heard by student B.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Discuss the differences in the sounds heard by student A and student B.

(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 13 marks)

9
*P60185A0928* Turn over
3 (a) A student charges a plastic rod by rubbing it with a cloth.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The rod becomes negatively charged.
(i) Which statement explains how the rod becomes negatively charged?
(1)
A the rod gains positively charged electrons

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
B the rod loses positively charged electrons
C the rod gains negatively charged electrons
D the rod loses negatively charged electrons

(ii) Describe how the student could demonstrate that the rod is charged.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P60185A01028*
(b) The student has several other rods made from different kinds of plastic.
Some rods can be charged positively and some can be charged negatively.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Describe an experiment to show that different rods have different types of charge.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 6 marks)

11
*P60185A01128* Turn over
4 A Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram shows how different astronomical objects may be
classified according to their colour and absolute magnitude.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

–5

0
red giants

main sequence
Absolute +5
magnitude

+10

white dwarfs

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
+15
blue white yellow red
Colour

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

12
*P60185A01228*
The diagram shows three stages of evolution for stars of similar mass to the Sun.
Describe the evolution of stars of similar mass to the Sun.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You should refer to the temperature and brightness of the stars in your answer.
(6)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 6 marks)

13
*P60185A01328* Turn over
5 Stearic acid is a solid at room temperature and melts at a temperature of 69 °C.
A student investigates the specific heat capacity of solid stearic acid.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

He heats a sample of stearic acid from room temperature using an electrical heater
and measures its temperature using a data logger and temperature sensor.
The graph shows his results.

Temperature
in °C 40

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
20

0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Time in s

(a) The student starts heating the stearic acid at 130 seconds.
(i) Determine the time it takes to heat the stearic acid until it reaches its
melting point.
(1)

time = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . s

(ii) The stearic acid gains 39 kJ of energy during the time it is heated to its melting point.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the mean (average) power of the heater. DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Give a unit with your answer.
[assume no energy lost to surroundings]
(3)

mean power = ............................................... unit ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P60185A01428*
(b) The mass of stearic acid used in the investigation is 0.45 kg.
The stearic acid gains 39 kJ of energy when it is heated to its melting point.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the specific heat capacity of stearic acid.

You should use data from the graph in your calculation.
(4)

specific heat capacity = ............................................... J/kg °C

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P60185A01528* Turn over
6 A student investigates transformers.
(a) The diagram shows a typical transformer.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

primary coil
secondary coil

core

State the name given to this type of transformer.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The student investigates the effect of changing the number of turns in the secondary coil.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

This is his method.

● apply a constant maximum voltage to a primary coil with 1200 turns
● use a secondary coil with 100 turns
● measure the output voltage of the transformer
● replace the secondary coil with one that has 200 turns
● measure the output voltage again
The student repeats this method using different numbers of turns in the secondary coil.
(i) Suggest how the student could improve the reliability of his investigation.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
*P60185A01728* Turn over
(ii) These are the student’s results.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

number of turns = 100, number of turns = 400,
output voltage = 1.3 V output voltage = 5.0 V
number of turns = 200, number of turns = 500,
output voltage = 2.5 V output voltage = 6.3 V
number of turns = 300, number of turns = 600,
output voltage = 3.8 V output voltage = 7.5 V

Draw a table of these results.

(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(iii) Suggest how the student could improve the precision of his voltage measurement.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P60185A01828*
(c) The student plots this graph to show the results of his investigation.

8.0
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6.0

Output
voltage in V 4.0

2.0

0.0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Number of turns on secondary coil

(i) The student plots one of his results incorrectly.

Draw a circle around the incorrectly plotted result on the graph.
(1)
(ii) Draw the line of best fit.
(1)
(iii) Describe the relationship shown by the graph.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
*P60185A01928* Turn over
(d) The primary coil has 1200 turns.
Using the student’s data, calculate the primary voltage used in his investigation.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(4)

primary voltage = ...................................... . . . . . . . . . V

(Total for Question 6 = 14 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P60185A02028*
7 A game is played on a table with balls of different colours.
(a) The diagram shows the white ball moving across a flat surface.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

v = 5.2 m/s

white ball

(i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.

(1)

(ii) The white ball has a mass of 170 g.

Calculate the momentum of the white ball.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
momentum = ............................................... kg m/s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P60185A02228*
(b) The white ball collides with a stationary black ball.

v = 5.2 m/s v v = 5.0 m/s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

white ball black ball white ball black ball

before collision after collision

(i) The black ball has a mass of 160 g.

After the collision, the black ball moves away from the white ball with a velocity
of 5.0 m/s.
Calculate the velocity of the white ball after the collision.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

velocity of white ball = ............................................. . . m/s

(ii) During the collision, the white ball exerts a force of 80 N on the black ball.
The direction of this force is to the right.
State the magnitude and direction of the force the black ball exerts on the
white ball during the collision.
(2)

magnitude of force = ....................................... . . . . . . . . N

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

direction of force = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)

23
*P60185A02328* Turn over
8 The photograph shows a device that can be used to ignite small pieces of combustible material.
The device consists of a cylinder containing trapped air and a piston.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

piston

cylinder
combustible
material

before pushing piston after pushing piston

A small piece of combustible material is placed at the bottom of the cylinder.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
When the piston is pushed quickly into the cylinder, the trapped air is compressed
and heats up.
This increase in temperature is enough to ignite the combustible material.
(a) The piston is quickly pushed down a distance of 145 mm.
The average force exerted on the piston is 4.2 N.
(i) State the formula linking work done, force and distance moved in the direction of the force.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the work done on the trapped air when the piston is quickly pushed down.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

work done = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . J

24
*P60185A02428*
(iii) State the maximum amount of energy that could be transferred to the
trapped air.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . J

(iv) Using ideas about molecules, explain why the trapped air heats up.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Suggest why the trapped air does not reach a high enough temperature to ignite
the combustible material if the piston is slowly pushed into the cylinder.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

25
*P60185A02528*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Thursday 16 January 2020

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball‑point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer allthequestions.
Answer
• – there may bequestions in the spaces provided
more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind about
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Try to answer every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.
Check

Turn over

*P62043A0120*
P62043A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P62043A0220*
Answer ALL questions.
1 This question is about energy resources.
(a) The table lists some methods of generating electricity using energy resources.
Place ticks ( ) in the table to show if each method uses a renewable energy resource.
One has been done for you.
(3)
Method of generating Uses a renewable
electricity energy resource
coal power station

diesel generator

geothermal power station

hydroelectric power station

natural gas turbine

nuclear power station

solar cell 

wind turbine

(b) Solar cells can be used to generate electricity.

(i) How is energy transferred from the Sun to a solar cell?

(1)
A by heating
B by radiation
C electrically
D mechanically

(ii) State one disadvantage of using solar cells to generate electricity.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
*P62043A0320* Turn over
2 The photograph shows a brass mass.

(a) State the formula linking density, mass and volume.

(1)

(b) The brass mass has a mass of 454 g.

The density of brass is 8.46 g/cm3.
Calculate the volume of the brass mass.
Give the unit.
(3)

volume = .............................................................. unit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 4 marks)

4
*P62043A0420*
3 Curling is a sport played on ice.
A player slides stone A across the ice towards a scoring zone.
The ice reduces friction so that there is negligible friction when the stone is sliding.

stone A

(a) Stone A leaves the player’s hand with a velocity of 2.90 m/s.
The mass of stone A is 17 kg.
(i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

(ii) Show that the momentum of stone A is approximately 50 kg m/s.

(2)

6
*P62043A0620*
(b) Stone A slides towards the scoring zone.
In the scoring zone, stone A collides with a stationary stone, B.

(i) After the collision, both stones move in the same direction as the initial
direction of stone A.
The velocity of stone A after the collision is 0.40 m/s.
Calculate the velocity of stone B after the collision.
[mass of stone B = 19 kg]
(4)

velocity of stone B = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(ii) When the stones collided, they were in contact for a time of 25 ms.
Calculate the magnitude of the force stone A exerted on stone B in this collision.
(3)

force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

7
*P62043A0720* Turn over
4 A student uses this apparatus to demonstrate the effect of electric charge.

funnel

plastic tubing

metal cap metal can

insulator
metal rod
thin piece of metal

He pours some fine powder into a funnel.

The fine powder moves through a length of plastic tubing and falls into a metal can.
The metal can rests on a metal cap.
The metal cap is connected to a thin piece of metal via a metal rod.
When the powder lands in the can, the thin piece of metal moves away from the
metal rod.
(a) Explain why the thin piece of metal moves away from the metal rod.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P62043A0820*
(b) A coulombmeter measures electric charge.

The student connects a coulombmeter to the metal can.

When all the powder has landed in the can, the coulombmeter shows a
reading of –9.4 × 10–9 C.

(i) Which statement is true for the metal can?

(1)
A it gains negatively charged electrons
B it loses negatively charged electrons
C it gains positively charged electrons
D it loses positively charged electrons

(ii) State the formula linking charge, current and time.

(1)

(iii) It takes a time of 12 s from when the powder starts landing in the metal can
until all the powder has landed in the can.
Calculate the mean charging current.
(3)

current = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

9
*P62043A0920* Turn over
(c) The student suggests that this demonstration is similar to refuelling an aircraft.
The powder represents the fuel and the metal can represents the fuel tank in the aircraft.

funnel

plastic tubing

metal cap metal can

insulator
metal rod thin piece of metal

Explain how the student should modify this apparatus to demonstrate how to minimise
the dangers when refuelling an aircraft.

You may add to the diagram to help your answer.

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 12 marks)

10
*P62043A01020*
5 A sonometer is a piece of equipment used to investigate the frequency of waves on a string.
The photograph shows a sonometer.

bridge string

length of string

The string is under tension. When the string is plucked it vibrates to produce a sound wave.

(a) Describe how an oscilloscope should be used to measure the frequency of the
sound wave from the sonometer.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
*P62043A01120* Turn over
(b) A student investigates how the frequency of sound from the sonometer varies
with the length of the string.
This is the student’s method.
● apply a constant tension force to the string
● pluck the string and measure the frequency of the sound wave produced
● move the bridge to change the length of the string
● pluck the string and measure the new frequency of the sound wave produced
Repeat the method for different lengths of string.

(i) Give a control variable for the student’s investigation.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The table shows the student’s results.

String Frequency in Hz
length
in cm Test 1 Test 2 Test 3 Mean

20 105 104 108 106

40 53 54 52 53

60 36 32 35

80 25 28 26 26

100 22 20 21 21

120 20 17 18 18

140 15 15 14 15

Calculate the mean frequency for a string length of 60 cm.

(2)

mean frequency = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

(iii) Plot a graph of the mean frequency and string length data on the grid.
(3)

(iv) Draw the curve of best fit.

(1)

12
*P62043A01220*
(v) Determine the string length needed to produce a sound wave of frequency 75 Hz.
(1)

string length = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

(vi) The student cannot hear the sound from the sonometer for some of the string
lengths tested.
Explain which of the string lengths produce sounds that humans cannot hear.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 14 marks)

13
*P62043A01320* Turn over
6 This question is about stars.

(a) Astronomers measure the absolute magnitude of stars.

State what is meant by the term absolute magnitude.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The evolution of stars can be shown on a Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram (HR diagram).
Complete the HR diagram by
● labelling the x‑axis
● completing the absolute magnitude scale
● drawing the main sequence, red giant and white dwarf regions
(5)

absolute +5
magnitude

blue white yellow red

..............................................................

(Total for Question 6 = 7 marks)

14
*P62043A01420*
7 The photograph shows a glass plate made from uranium glass.

Uranium oxide is used to give the glass a green colour.

(a) Uranium‑238 is the most common isotope of uranium and can be represented
using this symbol.

238
92 U
(i) State what information the numbers 92 and 238 give about the nucleus of this
isotope of uranium.
(2)

92........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Uranium‑238 decays by alpha emission.

Describe how the nucleus of a uranium‑238 atom changes as a result of
alpha emission.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P62043A01620*
(b) The table gives some information about the uranium glass plate.

mass of plate 1.1 kg

percentage (%) of plate made of uranium-238 (by mass) 4.5%

mass of uranium‑238 atom 4.0 × 10–27 kg

(i) Calculate the number of uranium‑238 atoms in the plate.

(2)

number of atoms = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Uranium‑238 is an alpha emitter and has a half‑life of 4.5 billion years.
Explain why it is safe to eat food from the uranium glass plate.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)

17
*P62043A01720* Turn over
8 This question is about magnetic fields.

(a) Diagram 1 shows a positively charged proton moving downwards in a uniform

magnetic field.

magnetic field

proton
force

velocity

Diagram 1

The proton experiences a force to the right.

What is the direction of the magnetic field?
(1)
A into the page
B left
C out of the page
D upward

18
*P62043A01820*
(b) When a current passes through a flat circular coil, a magnetic field is produced.
Complete diagram 2 by drawing the magnetic field of the flat circular coil.
(3)

to d.c. power supply

Diagram 2

Turn over for the last part of the question

19
*P62043A01920* Turn over
(c) A wireless charging base uses a magnetic field to charge the battery of a mobile phone.

wireless
charging base

mobile phone

There is an alternating current in a coil of wire in the charging base.

There is another coil of wire connected to the battery in the mobile phone.

(i) Explain how the wireless charging base charges the battery of the mobile phone.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using a high current in the
wireless charging base.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 9 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

20
*P62043A02020*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Thursday 16 January 2020

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

*P62044A0120*
P62044A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P62044A0220*
Answer ALL questions.

1 This question is about electromagnetic (EM) waves.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The boxes show some EM waves and their uses.

Draw one straight line from each EM wave to its correct use.
One has been done for you.
(3)

EM wave Use

gamma long range communication

infrared cooking

radio waves sterilising food

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

ultraviolet observing internal structures

x-rays fluorescent lamps

(b) Which of these is a hazard of microwave radiation?

(1)
A blindness
B cell mutation
C internal heating of tissue
D skin burns
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
*P62044A0320* Turn over
2 This question is about a folding table.
The diagram shows some of the forces acting on the table.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

wall

0.84 m

G table
hinge

weight force S

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) The weight of the table acts through point G.
State the name of point G.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from the pivot.
(1)

(c) The moment of the weight force of the table about the hinge is 92 N m.
By using the principle of moments, calculate the force S that a person applies to
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

keep the table in equilibrium.
(3)

force S = .............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

4
*P62044A0420*
(d) State Newton’s third law.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(e) State the magnitude and the direction of the force that the table applies to the
person holding the table.
(2)

magnitude = ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction = .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
*P62044A0520* Turn over
3 This question is about momentum.
Diagram 1 shows a neutron approaching a uranium-235 nucleus.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

before collision

2200 m / s 10 m / s

neutron

uranium-235

Diagram 1

(a) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.

(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(b) Calculate the momentum of the neutron.
Give a unit with your answer.
[mass of neutron = 1.67 × 10–27 kg]
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

momentum = .............................................. unit ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(c) State what is meant by the term conservation of momentum.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P62044A0620*
(d) Diagram 2 shows that when the neutron collides with the uranium-235 nucleus,
they combine to give a uranium-236 nucleus.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

After collision

uranium-236

Diagram 2

Use conservation of momentum to calculate the velocity, v, of the uranium-236 nucleus.

[mass of uranium-235 nucleus = 3.99 × 10–25 kg]
[mass of uranium-236 nucleus = 4.01 × 10–25 kg]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(4)

v = ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

7
*P62044A0720* Turn over
4 A metalworker uses a hammer of mass 1.8 kg to deform a piece of metal on an anvil.

hammer

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0.95 m

metal

anvil

(a) (i) Calculate the increase in the hammer’s gravitational potential energy (GPE)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
store when the hammer is raised through a height of 0.95 m above the metal.
[GPE gained = mass × gravitational field strength × height]
(2)

GPE increase = ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(ii) The metalworker moves the hammer down to strike the metal. DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The hammer must have at least 21 J of energy in its kinetic energy (KE) store as
it hits the metal to deform it.
Explain why the metalworker must do at least 4 J of mechanical work on the
hammer to deform the metal.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P62044A0820*
(b) (i) Calculate the velocity of the hammer just before it strikes the metal.
[KE of hammer = 21 J]
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(4)

velocity = ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(ii) When the hammer hits the metal, the hammer comes to rest without rebounding.
Calculate the mean (average) force needed to bring the hammer to rest in a
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

time of 0.12 s.
(2)

mean force = ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
*P62044A0920* Turn over
5 A student does an investigation to determine the temperature-time graph for water as it
changes state from ice to liquid water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The diagram shows the student’s apparatus.

12 V supply

lid
insulating
beaker material

ice cubes
thermometer

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
electrical heater

The ice has an initial temperature of –17 °C.

After 5 minutes, the ice begins to melt.
After a further 6 minutes, all the ice has melted.
The investigation continues for a total time of 20 minutes.
(a) (i) Sketch a graph on the axes to show how the temperature changes with time.
Assume that the rate of energy transfer from the heater to the ice cubes is constant.
(3)

Temperature
in °C
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0
Time in
minutes

–17

10
*P62044A01020*
(ii) Suggest a precaution the student should take to obtain high quality data.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) During the experiment the heater transfers 2500 J of energy to the beaker.
The beaker has a specific heat capacity of 880 J / kg °C and a mass of 48 g.
Calculate the increase in the temperature of the beaker.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

temperature increase = ........................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
*P62044A01120* Turn over
6 The diagram shows the first stages in a method of transferring energy electrically through
long distances.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pylon

power station

step-up
transformer

The table shows data about the step-up transformer.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
number of turns in primary coil 2600
input voltage in kV 15
output voltage in kV 330

(a) (i) State the formula linking input voltage, output voltage, number of primary turns
and number of secondary turns for a transformer.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.

(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

number of turns = ......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P62044A01220*
(b) Explain why step-up and step-down transformers are used in the large-scale transmission
of electricity.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to support your answer.

(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

13
*P62044A01320* Turn over
7 This question is about a proton moving in a uniform magnetic field.
(a) Describe how to use two permanent magnets to produce a uniform magnetic field.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(b) The diagram shows a proton moving in a circular path at constant speed in a
uniform magnetic field.
This motion is similar to the movement of a planet in the Solar System.

direction of proton
movement

proton

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the proton.
(1)
(ii) Accurately measure the diameter of the proton’s path.
(2)

diameter = ................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

14
*P62044A01420*
(iii) The proton completes one orbit of its circular path in a time period
of 8.7 × 10–6 seconds.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the orbital speed of the proton.

(3)

orbital speed = ..................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 7 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P62044A01520* Turn over
8 Diagram 1 shows two identical buzzers connected with springs.

post
spring A spring B
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

microphone
buzzer A buzzer B
force

Diagram 1
Spring A is connected to a post.
A force acts on the apparatus for a short period of time, pulling both buzzers to the right.
During this time, buzzer A moves 2 cm and buzzer B moves 4 cm.
(a) (i) Explain why buzzer B travels with twice the average speed of buzzer A.
(2)
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) A student connects the microphone to an oscilloscope to measure the frequency of

sound from the two buzzers while the force acts on the arrangement.
Explain the difference in the measured frequencies of sound from buzzer A
compared to buzzer B.
(3)
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
*P62044A01720* Turn over
(b) Diagram 2 shows an oscilloscope trace.
The trace represents the sound wave received by the microphone from buzzer A.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Oscilloscope settings
y direction: 1 square = 0.1 V
x direction: 1 square = 2 ms

Diagram 2
Measure the period of the sound waves from buzzer A.
Give your answer in standard form.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
period = ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s
(c) Diagram 3 shows two distant galaxies and the Earth.

Earth Galaxy P Galaxy Q

Not to scale
150 million light years

300 million light years

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 3
Light emitted from a nearby star has a wavelength of 590 nm.
The light from an identical star in galaxy P arrives at the Earth.
The wavelength of the light from the star in galaxy P is 600 nm.
(i) Calculate the change in wavelength for light from the star in galaxy P.
(1)

change in wavelength = .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nm

18
*P62044A01820*
(ii) Galaxy Q is twice as far away from the Earth as galaxy P.
Suggest how the speed of galaxy Q relates to the speed of galaxy P.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Suggest a value for the change in wavelength of light from an identical star in
galaxy Q when the light arrives at the Earth.
(1)

change in wavelength = .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nm

(iv) Explain how comparing the speeds of the two galaxies provides evidence for
the Big Bang theory.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 15 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

19
*P62044A01920*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 12 June 2020

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Try to answer every question.
• Check your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

*P65066A0124*
P65066A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E I V t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed v
time period T
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v 2 u 2 (2 a s )

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
p1 V1 p2 V2
pressure × volume = constant
pressure p1 p2
= constan t =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv mu )
force = F
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

Q m c T

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P65066A0224*
Answer ALL questions.
1 This question is about liquid nitrogen.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) (i) The diagram shows the arrangement of particles in solid nitrogen.
Draw the arrangement of particles in liquid nitrogen.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
solid liquid
(ii) Describe the motion of the particles in liquid nitrogen.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A teacher uses this method to find the density of liquid nitrogen.
• measure the mass of a container
• pour liquid nitrogen into the container
• measure the total mass of the container and the liquid nitrogen
• read the volume of the liquid nitrogen from the scale on the side of the container
(i) Give a safety precaution the teacher should take when pouring the liquid nitrogen.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the name of the apparatus that the teacher should use to measure the mass
of the container.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P65066A0424*
(iii) The table shows the teacher’s results.

mass of container in g 75
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mass of container + liquid nitrogen in g 149

volume of liquid nitrogen in cm3 88

Calculate the mass of liquid nitrogen in the container.

(1)

mass = ........................................................ g
(iv) State the formula linking density, mass and volume.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(v) Calculate the density of the liquid nitrogen.

Give a suitable unit.
(3)

density = ......................................................... unit = ................................. . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
*P65066A0524* Turn over
(c) Over time, the liquid nitrogen warms up and changes state from a liquid into a gas.
Describe the changes to the arrangement and motion of particles when the liquid

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

nitrogen changes state.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 13 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P65066A0624*
2 This question is about a demonstration to show the link between current and charge.

The diagram shows two metal plates, X and Y, with a metal ball moving between them.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

insulating thread

X Y

metal 3 kV power supply

ball + −

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) The two metal plates have no charge before the power supply is connected.
When plate Y is connected to the positive terminal of the power supply, the plate
becomes positively charged.
Explain how plate Y gains a positive charge.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) The metal ball becomes positively charged when it touches plate Y.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The metal ball then moves away from plate Y towards plate X.
Explain why the metal ball moves away from plate Y.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P65066A0824*
(ii) Give a reason why the ball is made of metal.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) When the metal ball moves away from plate Y to plate X, a charge of 5.1 × 10-6 C
is transferred.
(i) State the formula linking charge transferred, current and time taken.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the current if the metal ball takes 0.45 seconds to travel from plate Y
to plate X.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

current = .......................................................... A
(iii) Suggest why the current increases if the voltage of the power supply is increased.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) Give the name of the apparatus that can be used to measure current.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

9
*P65066A0924* Turn over
3 The diagram shows some of the forces acting on a large rubbish bin on wheels.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

not to scale

weight

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
98 cm

37 cm

(a) The weight of the bin acts through point G.

Give the name of point G.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The mass of the bin is 23 kg.

(i) What is the weight of the bin?
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A 23 kg DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

B 230 kg

C 230 N

D 23 000 N

10
*P65066A01024*
(ii) State the principle of moments.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) A person applies force F to the bin to keep it stationary.

Calculate the magnitude of force F.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

magnitude of force F = ......................................................... N

(iv) State the magnitude and direction of the force applied to the person by the bin.
(2)

magnitude = ......................................................... N

direction = ...................................................... . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

11
*P65066A01124* Turn over
4 The photograph shows a solar power farm.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using solar power rather than fossil fuels
to generate electricity.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P65066A01224*
(b) Solar panels produce direct current (d.c.).
The National Grid in many countries operates on alternating current (a.c.).
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Describe the difference between direct current (d.c.) and alternating current (a.c.).
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P65066A01324* Turn over
5 This question is about using radio waves to track an aeroplane.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA


aeroplane

aerial at airport

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Radio waves are emitted from an aerial at an airport, and are then reflected back
to the aerial from an aeroplane.
The time taken between emitting the radio waves and receiving the waves back
at the aerial is 1.9 milliseconds.
Show that the aeroplane is approximately 300 km away from the aerial.
[speed of radio waves = 3.0 × 105 km/s]
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

14
*P65066A01424*
(b) As the aeroplane travels away from the airport, it sends a signal to the airport
using radio waves with a wavelength of 1.2 m.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

When the signal is received at the airport, the wavelength is 1.1 × 10-6 m longer
than when it is emitted by the aeroplane.
Calculate the speed of the aeroplane using the formula

change of wavelength speed of aeroplane

wavelength speed of radio wave

[speed of radio waves = 3.0 × 108 m/s]
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

speed of aeroplane = .......................................................... m/s

(Total for Question 5 = 6 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15
*P65066A01524* Turn over
6 The Parker Solar Probe is a spacecraft that was launched in 2018 on a mission to explore
the Sun.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The spacecraft is partly covered in tiles.
These tiles are filled with a solid containing small pockets of trapped air.
The outer surface of the tiles is painted white.
These tiles protect the electric circuits in the spacecraft from extreme temperatures.
(a) The diagram shows one of these tiles in cross-section.

outer surface
of tile solid containing
small pockets of inner surface
trapped air of tile

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(i) Explain why the outer surface of the tile is painted white.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain how the small pockets of trapped air help to reduce thermal energy
transfer from the outer surface to the inner surface of the tile.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P65066A01624*
(b) The electric circuits inside the spacecraft are cooled by 4.5 kg of water.
The initial temperature of the water is 35 oC.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The thermal store of the water increases by 210 kJ.

Calculate the final temperature of the water.
[specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg oC]
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

final temperature = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

17
*P65066A01724* Turn over
7 Diagram 1 shows a loop of wire connected to a power supply.

loop of wire

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

+ −
variable
power
supply

card

Diagram 1

(a) Describe how to find the shape of the magnetic field produced by the loop of wire.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

18
*P65066A01824*
(b) Diagram 2 shows the view from above the card with two cross-sections of the
loop of wire.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Key
current out of page

current into page

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2
On diagram 2, draw the magnetic field produced by the two cross-sections of the
loop of wire.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

19
*P65066A01924* Turn over
(c) (i) These diagrams show the magnetic field acting on a cross-section of wire
when the current in the wire is out of the page.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A B
force force

magnetic field magnetic field

C D
force

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
force
magnetic field magnetic field

Which diagram shows the correct direction of the force acting on the cross-section
of wire due to the magnetic field?
(1)

D
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P65066A02024*
(ii) The magnetic field acting on the cross-section of wire is produced by the current
in the other side of the loop of wire.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain why there is no effect on the direction of the force on the cross-section
of wire when the direction of the current in the loop is reversed.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 =10 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

21
*P65066A02124* Turn over
8 Welding is a process where pieces of metal are melted and then joined together.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The diagram shows apparatus used for welding.

plug

transformer

input
current

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
output
current

The welding apparatus uses the transformer to decrease the voltage from 230 V.
(a) State the name of this type of transformer.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State the formula linking the turns ratio, the input voltage and the output voltage
for a transformer.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P65066A02224*
(c) The table gives some information about the transformer.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

input voltage in V 230

number of turns on input coil 16
number of turns on output coil 4
input current in A 11

(i) Use information from the table to calculate the output current of the transformer.
Assume that the transformer is 100% efficient.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

current = ............................. A

(ii) A fuse is installed in the plug which supplies the input current.
Which fuse should be used in this plug?
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A 3A

B 5A

C 10 A

D 13 A

(Total for Question 8 = 8 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
*P65066A02324*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 12 June 2020

Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
mind about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer
Try to every question.
• your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

*P65067A0120*
P65067A
©2020 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E I V t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed v
time period T
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v 2 u 2 (2 a s )

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
p1 V1 p2 V2
pressure × volume = constant
pressure p1 p2
= constan t =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv mu )
force = F
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

Q m c T

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P65067A0220*
Answer ALL questions.
1 This question is about electrostatics.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) A student uses a plastic rod to investigate electrostatics.

(i) Describe how the student could have charged the plastic rod.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The student uses a meter to measure the amount of charge on the rod.
The meter displays a reading of –5.2 mC.
Which of these is the same as –5.2 mC?
(1)

A –0.52 C

B –0.052 C

C –0.0052 C

D –0.00052 C
(iii) The rod is negatively charged.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Which statement correctly explains why the rod is negatively charged? DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

A the rod has gained negatively charged electrons

B the rod has gained positively charged electrons

C the rod has lost negatively charged electrons

D the rod has lost positively charged electrons

4
*P65067A0420*
(iv) Using a meter is one method of demonstrating that the rod is charged.
Describe another method of demonstrating that the rod is charged.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Electrostatic charges can be useful but they can also be dangerous.
(i) Give one use of electrostatic charges.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain why electrostatic charges can be dangerous when fuelling an aeroplane.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 9 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
*P65067A0520* Turn over
2 X-rays are electromagnetic waves used to obtain images of bones.
An x-ray machine produces x-ray waves with a frequency of 1.25 × 1018 Hz.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Calculate the time period of these x-rays.
(2)

time period = ......................................................... s

(b) X-rays have a speed of 3.00 × 108 m/s in air.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Calculate the wavelength of these x-rays.
(3)

wavelength = ......................................................... m

(Total for Question 2 = 5 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

6
*P65067A0620*
3 A builder needs to lift a large stone block.
(a) Diagram 1 shows the stone block.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
weight

Diagram 1
(i) Draw an X on diagram 1 at the centre of gravity of the stone block.
(1)
(ii) State the formula linking weight, mass and gravitational field strength.
(1)

(iii) The mass of the stone block is 130 kg.

Calculate the weight of the stone block.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

weight = ......................................................... N

8
*P65067A0820*
(b) The builder uses a wooden plank to lift the large stone block.
The plank is uniform and pivoted at its centre.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The builder pushes down on one end of the plank to lift the stone block.
Diagram 2 shows the plank when it is horizontal and stationary.

0.30 m distance X

weight 520 N

Diagram 2
(i) State the principle of moments.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The builder is pushing down with a force of 520 N to keep the plank horizontal.
Calculate distance X.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

distance X = .......................................................... m
(iii) Calculate the length of the plank.
(1)

length of plank = .......................................................... m

(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

9
*P65067A0920* Turn over
4 A student investigates the speed of sound in air.
(a) The student sets up two microphones, A and B, as shown in Diagram 1.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

microphone A microphone B
source
of sound

to datalogger

Diagram 1
The microphones are connected to a datalogger.
A sound is made to the left of microphone A.
The datalogger records the time when the sound wave reaches each microphone.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The student uses the data to calculate the time taken for the sound wave to travel
from microphone A to microphone B.
(i) Describe how the student could determine the speed of sound in air using his
calculated value of time taken.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Suggest why the student does not use a stop clock in this investigation. DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10
*P65067A01020*
(b) The student investigates how the speed of sound in air varies with temperature.
He places several Bunsen burners in the space between the microphones,
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

as shown in diagram 2.

microphone A microphone B
source
of sound

to datalogger heat heat heat heat heat heat

Diagram 2
He uses this method
• light all the Bunsen burners on a low heating flame
• measure the air temperature in three places between the microphones using
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

three temperature sensors

• use the datalogger to record the time taken for a sound wave to travel from
microphone A to microphone B
• determine the speed of sound
The student repeats this method as the air temperature increases.
(i) Suggest why it is important for all the Bunsen burners to burn the same amount
of gas each second.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
*P65067A01120* Turn over
(ii) The table shows the student’s results.

Temperature in °C

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time Speed
sensor 1 sensor 2 sensor 3 mean in ms in m/s

20.3 20.2 19.9 20.1 4.37 344

29.9 31.3 30.0 30.4 4.29 350

39.7 41.0 39.0 39.9 4.22 358

51.0 50.2 49.3 50.2 4.15 362

59.8 61.5 58.6 4.08 368

Calculate the mean temperature for the last row in the table.
Give your answer to a suitable number of decimal places.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(2)

mean temperature = .......................................................... °C

(iii) The student plots his results and draws the line of best fit.
Draw a circle around the anomalous result.
(1)
370
+

+
360
+
Speed
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

in m/s
350 +

+
340
20 30 40 50 60 70
Mean temperature in °C

12
*P65067A01220*
(iv) State how the student should deal with the anomalous result.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(v) Explain why a line graph is the correct type of graph to display these results.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(vi) Describe the relationship between the speed of sound in air and temperature.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 13 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

13
*P65067A01320* Turn over
5 Energy is transferred from the Sun to the Earth.

(a) Nuclear fusion happens in the Sun.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Which energy store of the Sun decreases during nuclear fusion?
(1)

A chemical

B kinetic

C nuclear

D thermal

(ii) How is energy transferred through space from the Sun to the Earth?
(1)

A by heating

B by radiation

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
C electrically

D mechanically

(b) Solar panels use energy from the Sun to heat water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

14
*P65067A01420*
(i) The total area of the solar panels is 15 m2.
Each 1.0 m2 of the solar panels receives 1000 J of energy per second from the Sun.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Show that the total energy transferred to the solar panels in 2 hours is about 100 MJ.
(3)

(ii) A mass of 1100 kg of cold water is in the solar panels at an initial temperature of 20 °C.
Calculate the final temperature of this water after it has been heated by the Sun
for 2 hours.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

[specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J/kg °C]

(4)

final temperature = .......................................................... °C

(iii) Give a reason why the actual final temperature of the water will be lower than
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

the calculated value.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)

15
*P65067A01520* Turn over
6 Conventional power stations burn fuel in a furnace.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

steam out

water in

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
burning fuel

(a) The fuel can be a solid, a liquid or a gas.

Describe the motion of particles in a solid, a liquid and a gas.
(3)

solid .................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

liquid ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

gas .. .................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P65067A01620*
(b) When the fuel is burned, energy is transferred from the fuel to the water.
The water boils and turns into steam.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Describe how energy stored in the fuel is transferred to the water.
Refer to energy stores and transfers in your answer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The temperature-time graph shows how the temperature of the water changes
as it is heated in the furnace at a constant rate.

Temperature

Time

Explain how the graph shows that the water changes state as it is heated.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

17
*P65067A01720* Turn over
7 A machine called the synchrocyclotron (SC) was designed to cause protons to move
in a circular path using strong magnetic fields.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The SC used electromagnets to produce the strong magnetic fields.
Describe the construction of a simple electromagnet.
You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows a proton moving at velocity v in the magnetic field produced
by the SC.

v
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The direction of the magnetic field is into the page.
Using the left hand rule, determine the direction of the force acting on the proton
due to the magnetic field.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P65067A01820*
(c) The SC is surrounded by very thick concrete walls.
The radiation produced by the SC created atoms of radioactive barium-133 in the
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

concrete walls.
Barium-133 has a half-life of 10.5 years.
(i) State what is meant by the term half-life.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) In 1990, the SC stopped being used at CERN, a research centre.

In 1990, the largest number of barium-133 atoms were found 40 cm deep in
the concrete walls.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Since 2014, members of the public have been allowed to visit the SC at CERN.
Explain why the radioactive barium-133 in the concrete walls is not a risk to people
visiting the SC.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 7 = 8 marks)

TURN OVER FOR QUESTION 8

19
*P65067A01920* Turn over
8 The Big Bang theory suggests that the Universe is approximately 14 billion years old.
(a) Describe the evolution of the Universe from the Big Bang until the present day.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Describe the evidence that supports the Big Bang theory.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

20
*P65067A02020*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 15 January 2021

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2P

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

*P68388A0124*
P68388A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P68388A0224*
Answer ALL questions.

1 The photograph shows a security camera.

The camera detects light waves and sound waves.

(a) State two differences between light waves and sound waves.
(2)

1 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The camera detects infrared waves, which allow the camera to record videos in the dark.
(i) Which of these electromagnetic waves has a longer wavelength than
infrared waves?
(1)
A gamma rays

B microwaves

C ultraviolet rays

D visible light waves

4
*P68388A0424*
(ii) Which of these is another use for infrared waves?
(1)
A fluorescent lamps

B heating lamps

C satellite transmissions

D sterilising medical equipment

(iii) Which of these is a harmful effect of infrared waves?

(1)
A blindness

B cancer

C internal heating of body tissue

D skin burns

(c) The grid shows the oscilloscope trace for a quiet, low‑pitch sound wave.
The security camera has an alarm that produces a loud, high‑pitch sound.
On the grid, draw a trace to represent the sound wave produced by the alarm.
(2)

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

5
*P68388A0524* Turn over
2 The nuclear equation shows how a nucleus of uranium‑236 may undergo nuclear fission.

236 140 94 1
92
U → 54
Xe + 38
Sr + 0
n
(a) Determine how many neutrons are released in this fission process.
(1)

number of neutrons = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The table gives some of the constituents of this nuclear fission.
Complete the table by putting one tick (ü) in each row to show whether the
constituent is a parent nucleus or a daughter nucleus.
(2)

Constituent Parent nucleus Daughter nucleus

strontium‑94

uranium‑236

xenon‑140

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 5 marks)

6
*P68388A0624*
3 A student uses this apparatus to investigate moments.

elastic bands at
15 cm intervals

newton meter

force applied

base of
clamp stand

This is the student’s method.

• attach elastic bands at 15 cm intervals on a one metre tall clamp stand
• attach a newton meter to the highest elastic band and measure the
horizontal force required to tilt the stand
• repeat the method at each 15 cm interval
(a) Name an instrument that the student should use to accurately measure the
distances on the clamp stand.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7
*P68388A0724* Turn over
(b) The table shows the student’s results.

Distance Force applied

in cm in N

15.0 10.0

30.0 5.6

45.0

60.0 2.6

75.0 2.2

90.0 1.8

(i) The photograph shows the reading on the newton meter when the
distance is 45.0 cm.

Use the photograph to determine the force required to tilt the stand when the
distance is 45.0 cm.
(1)

force = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(ii) Give a reason why this newton meter is unsuitable for measuring the force for
distances less than 15.0 cm.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) (i) Plot a graph of the student’s results on the grid.

(3)
(ii) Draw the curve of best fit.
(1)

8
*P68388A0824*
(d) The student concludes that the moment required to tilt the clamp stand does not
change when the distance is varied.
Use data from the table or the graph to evaluate the student’s conclusion.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

9
*P68388A0924* Turn over
4 The bar chart gives information about how some of the electrical power in the United
States of America (USA) was generated in the year 2018.

Percentage of
electrical power 20
generated (%)

0
Coal Natural Nuclear Solar Water Wind
gas
Energy resource

(a) Most of the electricity generated in the USA uses non‑renewable energy resources.
(i) State what is meant by the term non‑renewable.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Determine the percentage of electrical power generated using the

non‑renewable energy resources shown on the bar chart.
(2)

percentage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %

10
*P68388A01024*
(b) In 2018, the USA generated more than half of its electrical power by burning
fossil fuels.
Explain one way that burning fossil fuels can be harmful to the environment.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The mean total electrical power output of the USA in 2018 was 4.76 × 1011 W.
(i) Calculate the mean electrical power output from solar energy resources.
(2)

mean electrical power output = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W

11
*P68388A01124* Turn over
(ii) The mean total electrical power output of the USA in 2018 was 4.76 × 1011 W.
A typical solar farm generates 250 W of electrical power for every 1.0 m2 of
land area used.
Calculate the amount of land area needed if the USA were to generate all of
its electrical power using solar energy resources.
(2)

land area = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m2

(iii) The total land area of the USA is 9.83 × 1012 m2.
Discuss whether the USA could generate all of its electrical power using solar
energy resources.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 12 marks)

12
*P68388A01224*
5 Transformers are useful in the transmission of electricity.
(a) The diagram shows a step‑down transformer.

metal core

Output
Input voltage = 230 V
voltage = 275 kV current = 95 A

(i) Give the name of a suitable metal that could be used in the core of the transformer.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the formula linking input power and output power for a transformer.
(1)

(iii) The step‑down transformer has an input voltage of 275 kV and an

output voltage of 230 V.
The transformer has an output current of 95 A.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
Assume the transformer is 100% efficient.
(3)

input current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

14
*P68388A01424*
(b) Explain how transformers are useful in the large‑scale transmission of electricity.
You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(5)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)

15
*P68388A01524* Turn over
6 The Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram shows the relationship between the absolute magnitude
and colour of stars.

–5

Absolute
magnitude +5 Sun

+10

+15
blue white yellow red
Colour

The position of the Sun is shown on the Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram.

(a) Star W is a white dwarf.
Add a W to the Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram to show the position of star W.
(1)
(b) Star X is a red giant.
Add an X to the Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram to show the position of star X.
(1)
(c) Star Y is a main sequence star that is much larger than the Sun.
Add a Y to the Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram to show the position of star Y.
(1)
(d) Star Z has the same surface temperature as the Sun, but would be dimmer than
the Sun if it were the same distance away from Earth as the Sun.
Add a Z to the Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram to show the position of star Z.
(1)

16
*P68388A01624*
(e) The Moon is the brightest object in the night sky.
Suggest why the Moon cannot be shown on the Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 5 marks)

17
*P68388A01724* Turn over
7 The diagram shows a child’s toy for accelerating steel balls.

magnet
ball A ball B
ball C

This is how the toy works.

• the toy uses three identical steel balls, each with a mass of 4.1 g
• ball A moves towards the magnet
• ball B is in contact with the magnet
• balls B and C are initially at rest and are in contact with each other
• when ball A collides with the magnet, ball C moves away from the magnet

(a) Ball A moves towards the magnet with an initial velocity of 0.15 m/s.
Calculate the initial momentum of ball A.
(2)

initial momentum = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

(b) Ball A is attracted to the magnet.
Explain how this attraction affects the momentum of ball A as it approaches
the magnet.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P68388A01824*
(c) When ball A collides with the magnet, a force of 1.3 N is exerted on ball C for a
time of 0.0025 s.
This causes ball C to move away from the magnet.
Calculate the change in velocity of ball C due to this force.
(3)

change in velocity = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

19
*P68388A01924* Turn over
8 The diagram shows a simplified view of part of an inkjet printer.

negatively charged
ink drop

– – +
– +

negatively charged
– + positively charged
plate plate
– +
– +
– +
paper

A negatively charged ink drop falls vertically between a pair of charged plates.
(a) The ink drop experiences a horizontal electrostatic force as it falls.
Explain the direction of the electrostatic force exerted on the ink drop by the
charged plates.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) On the diagram, draw the path of the ink drop as it falls between the charged plates
until it hits the paper.
(2)

20
*P68388A02024*
(c) (i) The ink drop experiences a horizontal force of 8.5 × 10–7 N when it is between
the charged plates.
The mass of the ink drop is 1.1 × 10–10 kg.
Calculate the horizontal acceleration of the ink drop when it is between the
charged plates.
(3)

acceleration = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s2

(ii) The ink drop has no initial horizontal velocity before it passes between the
charged plates.
After passing between the charged plates, the horizontal velocity of the ink
drop is 3.9 m/s.
Calculate the horizontal distance travelled by the ink drop as it passes
between the charged plates.
Give your answer in mm.
(4)

distance = ...................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm

21
*P68388A02124* Turn over
(d) Explain how another ink drop could be deflected in the opposite direction by a
greater distance using the charged plates in the inkjet printer.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

22
*P68388A02224*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 15 January 2021

Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper Reference 4PH1/2PR

Physics
Unit: 4PH1
Paper: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Calculator, ruler

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

*P68389A0120*
P68389A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P68389A0220*
Answer ALL questions.

1 The diagram shows the temperature‑time graph for a substance which is heated at a
constant rate.

S T
80

Temperature
in °C –20 Q Time
R

–70
P

(a) (i) Which section of the graph shows when the substance is melting?
(1)
A PQ
B QR

C RS

D ST

(ii) Which section of the graph shows when all the substance is a solid?
(1)
A PQ
B QR

C RS

D ST

(iii) Draw particles in the box to show the arrangement of particles when the
substance is a gas.
(1)

4
*P68389A0420*
(iv) Which of these statements best describes the motion of particles in a gas?
(1)
A they vibrate about fixed points

B they are stationary

C they slide past each other

D they move quickly and randomly

(b) (i) Name a piece of apparatus that could be used to measure the temperature of
the substance.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Determine the boiling point of this substance.

(1)

boiling point = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(c) The substance has a mass of 1.2 kg.

Calculate the energy required to raise the temperature of the substance from
10 °C to 37 °C.
[assume specific heat capacity of substance = 840 J/kg °C]
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 1 = 9 marks)

5
*P68389A0520* Turn over
2 The diagram shows a metal block on top of a wooden block.
The metal block is held stationary by force F.

G metal
block

P
4.3 cm

wooden 11 cm
block
force F

(a) (i) The weight of the metal block acts through point G.
Give the name of point G.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Name a piece of apparatus that could be used to measure the weight of the
metal block.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P68389A0620*
(b) (i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from the pivot.
(1)

(ii) The weight of the metal block is 0.68 N.

Show that the moment of the weight of the metal block about point P is
approximately 2.9 N cm.
(1)

(iii) Force F is applied to the metal block to stop it from moving.

Calculate the magnitude of force F.
(3)

force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(Total for Question 2 = 7 marks)

7
*P68389A0720* Turn over
3 The diagram shows an air track that can be used to investigate motion without friction.
Air comes out through a series of small holes in the air track, which lifts the gliders
slightly above the track.
There are two gliders on the track.
Each glider has a magnet.

0.045 kg m/s magnet magnet

A B

glider B
glider A
(at rest)
air in
air track

The poles of the magnets nearest each other are alike.

(a) Explain the direction of the force acting on magnet A from magnet B.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The gliders collide and the magnets cause them to rebound.
Before the collision, the momentum of glider A is 0.045 kg m/s to the right and
glider B is at rest.
(i) State the total momentum of glider A and glider B after the collision.
(1)

total momentum = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

8
*P68389A0820*
(ii) After the collision, the momentum of glider A is 0.021 kg m/s to the left.
Calculate the momentum of glider B after the collision.
(2)

momentum of glider B = ............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m/s

(iii) The time taken for glider B to change its momentum is 0.19 seconds.
Calculate the average force on glider B that causes this change in momentum.
(2)

average force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(iv) Give the direction of the force on glider B from glider A.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

9
*P68389A0920* Turn over
4 (a) A student uses an oscilloscope to determine the speed of sound.
The diagram shows the oscilloscope trace produced by the sound wave.

Oscilloscope settings
y direction: 1 square = 1 mV
x direction: 1 square = 1 ms

The student uses two microphones and a ruler to determine the wavelength of
the sound wave.
He finds that the wavelength is 1.4 m.
(i) State the formula linking the speed, frequency and wavelength of a wave.
(1)

(ii) Use the oscilloscope trace to calculate the speed of the wave.
(5)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

10
*P68389A01020*
(b) Another student uses this method to determine the speed of sound.
Step 1 T he student stands 50 m away from her teacher, measuring the distance
with a metre ruler.
Step 2 The teacher makes a loud sound and flashes a light at the same time.
Step 3 The student starts the stopwatch when she sees the flash of light.
Step 4 She stops the stopwatch when she hears the loud sound.
The speed of sound is calculated using the formula

distance
speed of sound =
time taken

Evaluate whether this method could produce an accurate value for the speed of
sound in air.
(5)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 11 marks)

11
*P68389A01120* Turn over
5 An aircraft travels along a runway.
(a) The aircraft starts from rest and has a constant acceleration of 4.1 m/s2.
Calculate the distance required to reach take‑off speed of 75 m/s.
(3)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(b) The aircraft takes off and reaches its maximum height above the ground.
At maximum height, the background radiation count rate is higher than on the ground.
(i) Explain what is meant by background radiation.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Suggest why there is a limit to the number of hours that an airline pilot can fly
at maximum height.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 8 marks)

12
*P68389A01220*
6 The Big Bang theory describes the evolution of the universe.
(a) Explain how cosmic microwave background radiation (CMBR) supports the
Big Bang theory.
(2)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Hydrogen gas in a laboratory on Earth emits light with a wavelength of 605 nm.
A distant galaxy contains hydrogen which emits light of the same wavelength.
The wavelength of the light from the distant galaxy is measured as 683 nm on Earth.
Calculate the speed of the distant galaxy.
[speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m/s]
(4)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(Total for Question 6 = 6 marks)

13
*P68389A01320* Turn over
7 The diagram shows part of a device used to demonstrate electrostatic charge.

water in

metal metal
A B
bucket V bucket

rubber mat

(a) Negatively charged water droplets fall into bucket A.

Describe how bucket A becomes negatively charged.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain why the negatively charged droplets spread out as they fall.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P68389A01420*
(c) (i) A droplet hits bucket A with a speed of 3.8 m/s.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the droplet when it hits bucket A.
[mass of droplet = 6.2 × 10–9 kg]
(3)

kinetic energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(ii) The total charge stored in bucket A is –1.1 × 10–10 C.

This charge passes through the air between the buckets in 9.2 × 10–3 s,
causing a spark between bucket A and bucket B.
Calculate the mean current between the buckets.
(3)

mean current = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

(iii) The spark transfers a charge of –1.1 × 10–10 C.

The mean voltage between the buckets is 1.7 kV.
Calculate the energy transferred by the spark.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

15
*P68389A01520* Turn over
8 The diagram shows a step‑down transformer.

primary coil
(160 turns)
iron core

12 V V

secondary coil
(45 turns)

(a) Explain the operation of a step‑down transformer.

(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P68389A01620*
(b) (i) State the formula linking input voltage, output voltage and the turns ratio of
a transformer.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the output voltage for the transformer.

(3)

voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(Total for Question 8 = 8 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

17
*P68389A01720*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes

Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
PAPER: 2P

2021 June
You must have: Total Marks
Calculator, ruler

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centre
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• mind
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your
about an answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new
answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Try to answer every question.
• Good luck
Check your answers if you have time at the end.
• with your examination.
Turn over

*P67161A0124*
P67161A
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P67161A0224*
Answer ALL questions.

1 (a) This is an incomplete Hertzsprung-Russell diagram.

Absolute
magnitude

Temperature

(i) Which of these is in the shaded area of the diagram?

(1)
A black holes
B main sequence stars
C neutron stars
D protostars

(ii) On the diagram, draw the area to show the position of white dwarf stars.
Label this area WD.
(1)
(iii) On the diagram, draw the area to show the position of red giant stars.
Label this area RG.
(1)
(iv) State what is meant by the term absolute magnitude.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P67161A0424*
(b) The Sun emits various parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
(i) Which part of the electromagnetic spectrum causes damage to human
surface skin cells?
(1)
A microwaves
B radio waves
C ultraviolet
D visible light

(ii) Which of these increases the risk of damage to human surface skin cells?
(1)
A sunbathing
B using protective sun cream
C very cloudy weather
D wearing sunglasses

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

5
*P67161A0524* Turn over
2 Two students investigate the speed of sound.
Student A has a device that makes a loud sound.
Student B has a stopwatch.
A sound wave travels from student A to the wall and is reflected back to student B.

not to scale wall

210 metres

120 metres

A B

(a) Calculate the total distance the sound wave travels from student A to the wall and
back to student B.
(1)

distance = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(b) Student B hears the sound before and after the sound wave reflects from the wall.
When student B hears the sound before reflection, he starts the stopwatch.
When student B hears the sound after reflection, he stops the stopwatch.
The students repeat this experiment five times.
The table shows the students’ results.

Time in s
0.50 0.62 0.52 0.58 0.55

Calculate the mean (average) time.

Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
(2)

mean time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

6
*P67161A0624*
(c) Calculate the speed of sound for this investigation.
(4)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(d) Suggest a reason why the students’ results are not always the same.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

7
*P67161A0724* Turn over
3 The diagram shows part of a radio antenna.
The plastic tube protects the radio antenna from bad weather.
Dust particles carried by the wind rub against the plastic tube.
After some time, the dust particles cause the tube to become positively charged.

plastic tube

antenna

metal mast

wire attached
to Earth

(a) State the property of plastic that allows it to become electrostatically charged.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain how the plastic tube becomes positively charged.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P67161A0824*
(c) The plastic tube is attached to a metal mast.
This would cause the metal mast to become positively charged.
Explain why there is a wire connecting the metal mast to the Earth.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) The plastic tube gains a charge of 4.3 mC.

The energy stored on the tube is 3.7 J.
Calculate the voltage between the plastic tube and the metal mast.
(3)

voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V
(e) An engineer is working on the radio antenna.
Describe the hazard to the engineer if there is no earth wire.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

9
*P67161A0924* Turn over
4 (a) A student investigates a sound wave with a frequency of 25 000 Hz.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of this sound wave.
[speed of sound = 330 m/s]
(3)

wavelength = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m
(ii) The oscilloscope trace represents the sound wave.

Oscilloscope settings
y direction: 1 square = 5 V
x direction: 1 square = 0.01 ms

Determine the amplitude of the oscilloscope trace.

(2)

amplitude = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

10
*P67161A01024*
(b) (i) Diagram 1 shows a coil of wire wrapped around a cardboard tube.
The coil is fixed to the cardboard tube.
On diagram 1, draw field lines to represent the magnetic field produced when
the current is in the direction shown.
(3)

Diagram 1

11
*P67161A01124* Turn over
(ii) Diagram 2 shows a model of a loudspeaker that uses the coil and the cardboard tube.
The cardboard tube is fixed to a thin piece of card, which is clamped at both ends.

cardboard tube

card

coil
to alternating
current supply

bar magnet

Diagram 2

The student holds a bar magnet near the bottom of the cardboard tube.
Explain why this causes the loudspeaker to produce a sound.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P67161A01224*
(iii) When the frequency of the alternating current is 10 kHz, the student hears a sound.
The student increases the frequency of the alternating current to 25 kHz.
Explain why the student cannot hear a sound now, even though the card is
still vibrating.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) Suggest a change to the apparatus that would increase the loudness of the
sound when the frequency of the alternating current is 10 kHz.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 14 marks)

13
*P67161A01324* Turn over
5 The diagram shows some of the apparatus a student uses to investigate the effect of
heating a solid substance.

12 V supply

lid
insulating material

beaker
thermometer
solid substance

electrical heater

(a) Describe how the student could use their apparatus to help determine the
specific heat capacity of the substance.
You should give details of any additional apparatus needed in your answer.
(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
*P67161A01524* Turn over
(b) The student continues to heat the substance, keeping the power of the heater constant.
The graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.

Temperature
in °C
30

0
0
Time

(i) Use the graph to determine the melting point of this substance.
(1)

melting point = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(ii) Describe, in terms of particles, what is happening in the substance when the
graph line is horizontal.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P67161A01624*
(iii) Suggest why the two non-horizontal lines on the graph have different gradients.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 10 marks)

17
*P67161A01724* Turn over
6 This is a question about a nuclear fusion power station.
(a) Explain what happens during nuclear fusion.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows how a fusion power station could supply the National Grid in
the future.

pylon, 330 kV

fusion
power station
28 kA, 21 kV
step-up
transformer

(i) State the main method of energy transfer from the fusion power station
generator to the primary coil of the step-up transformer.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P67161A01824*
(ii) The fusion power station could supply the input coil of the step-up transformer
with a current of 28 kA at a voltage of 21 kV.
The output coil of the transformer has a voltage of 330 kV.
Assume the transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the current in the output coil of the transformer.
(3)

current = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kA

(Total for Question 6 = 7 marks)

19
*P67161A01924* Turn over
7 The diagram shows two blocks at rest on a table, viewed from above.
A spring is attached to the large block.
The small block is attached by a piece of string to a fixed point on the table.
A student pushes the two blocks together so that the spring is compressed.

fixed point

large block small block

mass 75 g mass 17 g

spring

(a) The student releases the blocks.

The kinetic energy (KE) store of the small block is 0.29 J when the blocks are no
longer in contact.
Show that the speed of the small block is about 6 m/s.
(3)

20
*P67161A02024*
(b) Using ideas about momentum, show that the speed of the large block is
about 1 m/s after the blocks are no longer in contact.
(4)

(c) The small block takes 0.11 s to reach 6 m/s.

Calculate the mean force exerted on the small block by the spring.
(3)

mean force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

QUESTION 7 CONTINUES ON NEXT PAGE

21
*P67161A02124* Turn over
(d) The small block then moves around the fixed point on the table.
The block moves in a circular orbit of radius 17.6 cm at a constant orbital speed of 6 m/s.
The time period of the orbit can be found using the formula

2π × orbital radius
orbital speed =
time period

Calculate the time period of the orbit.

(3)

time period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

22
*P67161A02224*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel
International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes

Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
PAPER: 2P

November 2021
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
• your
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box
mind about an answer, put a line through the box
. If you change
and then mark
your new answer with a cross .

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
• Checkanswer
Try to every question.
• Good luck
your answers if you have time at the end.
• with your examination.
Turn over

*P67162RA0124*
P67162RA
©2021 Pearson Education Ltd.

1/1/1/1/1/1
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv - mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P67162RA0224*
Answer ALL questions.

1 This question is about astrophysics.

(a) The table lists some statements about the universe.
Place ticks () in the table to show which statements support the Big Bang theory.
.(2)

Supports the
Statement
Big Bang theory

black holes are formed from extremely massive stars

cosmic microwave background radiation is detected in all directions

cosmic rays from space are detected at the Earth’s surface

each galaxy contains billions of stars

most galaxies show a red-shift in the light detected from them

(b) The Sun will become a red giant star when it leaves the main sequence.
Which row correctly describes how the surface temperature and brightness of the
Sun will change when it becomes a red giant?
(1)
Surface
Brightness
temperature
A decreases decreases

B decreases increases

C increases decreases

D increases increases

(c) Astronomical objects can be classified by their absolute magnitude.

State what is meant by the term absolute magnitude.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

*P67162RA0324*
3
Turn over
2 The photograph shows the Three Gorges Dam in China, one of the largest
hydroelectric power stations on Earth.

reservoir

river

dam

(a) State two advantages of generating electricity using hydroelectric power stations.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Water is held in a reservoir on one side of the dam.

The water flows through turbines to a river on the other side of the dam.
The water level of the river is lower than the water level of the reservoir.
(i) State which energy store of the water decreases as the water flows from the
reservoir to the river.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) How is energy transferred from the dam to homes and factories in China?
(1)
A by heating

B by radiation

C electrically

D mechanically

4
*P67162RA0424*
(c) The Three Gorges Dam has a larger maximum output power than any other
hydroelectric power station on Earth.
(i) State what is meant by the term power.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The mean energy transferred by the dam each day is 9.7 × 1014 J.
Calculate the mean output power of the dam.
(3)

mean output power = ................................................................... W

(iii) The maximum output power is 22 500 MW.

Which of these is the same as 22 500 MW?
(1)
A 22 500 000 J

B 22 500 000 J/s

C 22 500 000 000 J

D 22 500 000 000 J/s

(iv) Suggest why the Three Gorges Dam does not always operate at its maximum
output power.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

*P67162RA0524*
5
Turn over
3 This question is about solids, liquids and gases.
(a) Melting is the process that occurs when a solid changes into a liquid.
Using ideas about particles, describe the process of melting.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A sealed metal flask contains air at room temperature.

The flask is then heated.
The graph shows how the pressure of the air increases as its temperature increases.

160

140

Pressure
in kPa 120

100

80
250 300 350 400 450
Temperature in kelvin

6
*P67162RA0624*
(i) Explain how heating the flask increases the temperature of the air inside the flask.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain why the pressure of the air increases as its temperature increases.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Using the graph, determine the pressure of the air when its temperature is 400 K.
(1)

pressure = ............................................................ kPa

(iv) The air in the flask is now cooled to a temperature of 230 K.

Calculate the new pressure of the air.
(3)

pressure = ............................................................ kPa

(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

*P67162RA0724*
7
Turn over
4 In extreme conditions, the isotope lithium-6 can be made to undergo nuclear fission.
(a) The lithium-6 nucleus absorbs a neutron and produces an alpha particle and an
isotope of hydrogen.
The incomplete nuclear equation for this fission is

6 4
3
Li + 1
0
n → 2
He + H

(i) Complete the nuclear equation by writing the numbers in the boxes.
(2)
(ii) Explain why this fission does not cause a chain reaction.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain the difference between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 6 marks)

8
*P67162RA0824*
5 A student investigates how the support forces acting on a metre rule are affected by
the position of a mass hanger.
He uses this apparatus.

newton meter A newton meter B

metre rule

mass hanger

This is the student’s method.

● suspend a metre rule from its 10 cm and 90 cm marks using two newton meters
● place a mass hanger with a weight of 5 N at the 20 cm mark on the metre rule
● adjust the heights of the newton meters until the metre rule is horizontal
● record the readings on both newton meters
The student repeats the method, moving the mass hanger to a different position on
the metre rule each time.
(a) (i) State the independent variable in the student’s investigation.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State two control variables in the student’s investigation.

(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Suggest how the student could improve the quality of his data.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*P67162RA0924*
9
Turn over
(b) The table shows the student’s results.

Position of mass Reading on newton Reading on newton

hanger in cm meter A in N meter B in N

20 5.1 1.4

30 4.5 2.0

40 3.9 2.6

50 3.3 3.3

60 2.6 3.9

70 2.0 4.5

80 1.4 5.1

The graph shows the results for newton meter A.

6.0

4.0
Reading on
newton meter
in N
2.0

0.0
0 20 40 60 80 100
Position of mass hanger in cm

(i) Plot the results for newton meter B.

(1)
(ii) Draw the line of best fit for newton meter B.
(1)

10
*P67162RA01024*
(iii) Describe the relationships shown by the graph.
(4)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) Using ideas about moments, explain why the reading on newton meter A
decreases as the mass hanger is moved towards newton meter B.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 13 marks)

*P67162RA01124*
11
Turn over
6 This question is about electromagnetism.
(a) Diagram 1 shows the construction of an electromagnet.

metal core

coil of wire

Diagram 1

(i) Name a suitable metal for the core.

(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State what must be done to the coil of wire to produce a magnetic field.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*P67162RA01324*
13
Turn over
(b) Electromagnets are used in transformers to change the size of a voltage.
Diagram 2 shows the construction of a simple transformer.

primary coil (1500 turns) secondary coil (280 turns)

metal core

voltage = 115 V
current = 1.2 A

Diagram 2

(i) State the formula linking the input (primary) voltage, output (secondary) voltage
and the turns ratio for a transformer.
(1)

(ii) The input voltage to the transformer is 115 V.

Show that the output voltage is approximately 20 V.
(3)

14
*P67162RA01424*
(iii) The input current to the transformer is 1.2 A.
Calculate the output current.
Assume that the transformer is 100% efficient.
(3)

output current = ............................................................ A

(iv) State two factors that would increase the output current of the transformer.
(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 11 marks)

*P67162RA01524*
15
Turn over
7 An electrostatic paint sprayer is used to paint an object.

paint
particles
uncharged
object

positively charged
nozzle

wire to
power supply

(a) The nozzle of the paint sprayer is positively charged.

Explain the advantage of using a charged nozzle.
.(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P67162RA01624*
(b) The object is an electrical conductor and is initially uncharged.
Explain why the painting process would be more effective if the object were earthed.
.(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

*P67162RA01724*
17
Turn over
8 The photograph shows an oscilloscope.

An oscilloscope can be used to determine the frequency of a sound wave.

(a) (i) Name the piece of equipment that should be used with an oscilloscope to
detect a sound wave.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Describe how an oscilloscope can be used to measure the time period of a
sound wave.
(2)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*P67162RA01924*
19
Turn over
(b) Diagram 1 shows an oscilloscope screen when a sound wave is detected.
It also shows the settings of the oscilloscope.

Oscilloscope settings
y direction: 1 square = 2 V
x direction: 1 square = 5 × 10-6 s

Diagram 1

(i) Determine whether the sound can be heard by humans.

Include a calculation of frequency in your answer.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20
*P67162RA02024*
(ii) The oscilloscope settings are changed, as shown in Diagram 2.

Oscilloscope settings
y direction: 1 square = 1 V
x direction: 1 square = 1 × 10-5 s

Diagram 2

On Diagram 2, draw the wave that would be displayed on the oscilloscope

screen if the same sound wave is detected using these new settings.
(2)

(Total for Question 8 = 9 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

*P67162RA02124*
21
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P
January 2022
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

*P70707A0124*
P70707A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

L:1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P70707A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.

Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 (a) Which of these is a device used to measure force?

(1)
A newton meter

B ruler

C thermometer

D voltmeter

(b) Airbags are safety devices used in cars to protect the driver if there is a crash.
(i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

(ii) A person inside a car has a mass of 72 kg and a velocity of 13 m/s.

Show that the momentum of the person is about 900 kg m/s.
(1)

(iii) The person experiences a crash and comes to rest in 0.29 s.

Calculate the force on the person.
(2)

force = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

4
*P70707A0424* 
(iv) Which statement explains how airbags protect the driver?
(1)
A increase the force acting on the driver

B increase the time taken for the driver to stop

C increase the kinetic energy store of the driver

D increase the momentum of the driver

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
 *P70707A0524* Turn over
2 (a) Describe the arrangement and motion of particles in a solid.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A solid changes state by melting at a certain temperature.

For phosphorus, this change of state occurs at 44 °C.
Sketch how the temperature of a sample of phosphorus changes when it is
heated at a constant rate from –40 °C to 80 °C.
(3)

Temperature
20
in °C

0 Time

–20

–40

(Total for Question 2 = 6 marks)

6
*P70707A0624* 
3 Nuclear fusion is a process that occurs in the core of stars.
(a) Which is the best description of nuclear fusion?
(1)
A large nucleus splitting into two smaller nuclei

B nucleus emitting an electromagnetic wave

C nucleus releasing a beta particle

D two smaller nuclei joining together to form a larger nucleus

(b) Two nuclei are close together and stationary.

Explain why these nuclei will move apart.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 5 marks)

7
 *P70707A0724* Turn over
4 A student investigates how the strength of the magnetic field from a solenoid
changes with distance from the end of the solenoid.
The diagram shows the solenoid connected to a power supply.

distance

(a) The student uses a device called a Hall probe, which can be placed anywhere in
the magnetic field to measure its strength at that point.
Design a suitable method for the investigation.
Your answer should include
• any extra measuring equipment needed
• details of the independent variable, dependent variable and any
control variables
You may include a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

8
*P70707A0824* 
............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
 *P70707A0924* Turn over
(b) The graph shows the results of the student’s investigation.

30
Strength of
magnetic field in
arbitrary units
20

0
0 10 20 30 40 50
Distance in cm

The student suggests that the relationship linking the strength of the magnetic
field and the distance from the end of the solenoid is

strength of magnetic field × (distance)3 = constant

Use readings from the graph to deduce whether the results of the student’s
investigation support this relationship.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

10
*P70707A01024* 
5 The diagram shows a ball at the bottom of a ramp. The ball moves up the ramp with
an initial speed v.

v
29 cm

ball

(a) State the formula linking gravitational potential energy (GPE), mass, gravitational
field strength (g) and height.
(1)

(b) The ball has a mass of 14 g.

Show that when the ball reaches a height of 29 cm above the bottom of the ramp,
the GPE gained by the ball is about 4 × 10−2 J.
(3)

(c) At the bottom of the ramp, the 14 g ball has a kinetic energy (KE) of 5.1 × 10−2 J.
Calculate the speed of the ball at the bottom of the ramp.
(3)

speed = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

12
*P70707A01224* 
(d) The ball is stationary when it reaches the top of the ramp. There is a difference
between the KE of the ball at the bottom of the ramp and the GPE of the ball at a
height of 29 cm above the bottom of the ramp.
Explain why the work done by friction between the ball and the ramp is equal to
this difference.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

13
 *P70707A01324* Turn over
6 Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) machines can take scans of the inside of
a patient.
(a) There is an electromagnet inside the MRI machine.
Describe the construction of an electromagnet.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(4)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
 *P70707A01524* Turn over
(b) During the scan, music can be played through a loudspeaker to the patient.
The oscilloscope trace in the diagram represents a sound played to the patient.

Oscilloscope settings:

0 y direction: 1 square = 0.5 V

x direction: 1 square = 0.5 ms

(i) Determine the period of the sound wave.

(3)

period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s
(ii) Calculate the frequency of the sound wave.
(2)

frequency = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

16
*P70707A01624* 
(iii) Deduce whether humans can hear the sound wave.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) The current in the loudspeaker is alternating current (a.c.).

Give the evidence from the oscilloscope trace to support this statement.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(v) Draw the circuit symbol for an a.c. power supply.

(1)

(Total for Question 6 = 14 marks)

17
 *P70707A01724* Turn over
7 The photographs show two large-scale electrical production methods
• a hydroelectric power (HEP) station
• a wind farm

(Source: © Bryan Busovicki/Shutterstock) (Source: © Tom Buysse/Shutterstock)

Hydroelectric power station Wind farm

(a) Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of using hydroelectric power stations
compared with wind farms for large-scale electricity production.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P70707A01824* 
(b) Describe the energy transfers that are involved in generating electricity in a
hydroelectric power station.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

19
 *P70707A01924* Turn over
8 (a) (i) A galaxy moves away from the Earth at a speed of 3.9 × 104 km/s.
The speed of light is 3.0 × 105 km/s.
Light from the galaxy is emitted with a wavelength of 6.2 × 10−7 m.
Calculate the change in the wavelength of the light that is received by an
observer on the Earth.
(3)

change in wavelength = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

(ii) Calculate the wavelength of light that is received by an observer on the Earth.
(1)

wavelength = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

20
*P70707A02024* 
(b) One of the pieces of evidence for the Big Bang theory is the red-shift of galaxies.
Explain how the red-shift of galaxies supports the Big Bang theory.
(3)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

21
 *P70707A02124* Turn over
9 A student uses a small iron nail and a beaker of water to estimate the temperature
of a flame. The diagram shows some of the equipment used.

nail
flame

beaker
heatproof mat water

This is the student’s method

• place a thermometer into the beaker of water
• record the temperature of the water
• heat the nail in the flame for a long period of time
• quickly move the nail into the beaker of water
• record the highest temperature of the water
(a) State a safety precaution the student should take.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22
*P70707A02224* 
(b) While in the water, the thermal energy store of the nail decreases and the thermal
energy store of the water increases until their temperatures are the same.
The energy lost from the nail is equal to the energy gained by the water.
The table shows the student’s results.

Mass of water in g 138

Specific heat capacity of water in J/kg °C 4200

Temperature change of water in °C 5.0

Mass of nail in g 4.8

Specific heat capacity of iron in J/kg °C 450

(i) Show that the energy gained by the water is approximately 3000 J.
(2)

(ii) Calculate the temperature change of the nail.

(3)

Temperature change = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(iii) Give a reason why the calculated temperature change of the nail is lower than
the actual temperature change.
(1)

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 9 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
 *P70707A02324*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR
January 2022
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball‑point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

*P70714A0124*
P70714A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

L:1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P70714A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.

Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 (a) The table lists four methods of generating electricity and four energy stores.

Energy store

Method of generating Gravitational

Thermal Kinetic Chemical
electricity potential

geothermal power station

hydroelectric power station

petrol generator

wind turbine

The energy store of the initial energy resource decreases when electricity is
being generated.
(i) Complete the table by placing one tick () in each row to show which energy
store decreases.
(4)
(ii) State which method of generating electricity in the table does not use a
renewable energy resource.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State two disadvantages of using wind turbines to generate electricity.

(2)

1.............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

3
 *P70714A0324* Turn over
2 Cricket is a sport played with bats and balls.

(a) (i) A cricket player hits a ball with a bat. Before the ball is hit, it is moving to the
left with a momentum of 4.2 kg m/s.
The bat is in contact with the ball for 0.012 s.
After the ball is hit, it moves to the right with a momentum of 6.7 kg m/s.
Calculate the mean force the bat exerts on the ball and state the direction of
the force.
(3)

mean force = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the magnitude and direction of the mean force the ball exerts on
the bat.
(1)

magnitude of mean force = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction of force .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P70714A0424* 
(b) The cricket player wears padded protective equipment.
This protective equipment reduces the risk of injury to the player if they are struck
by the cricket ball.
Explain how this protective equipment reduces the risk of injury to the player.
Use ideas about momentum in your answer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 7 marks)

5
 *P70714A0524* Turn over
3 Two students do an experiment to measure the speed of sound in air.

They use two blocks of wood that make a loud noise when hit together.

They do their experiment outside in a wide‑open space.

(a) Describe how the students should use their equipment to measure the speed of
sound in air.

You may draw a diagram to support your answer.

(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P70714A0624* 
(b) The table shows the students’ results.

Time in s
Distance in m
Trial 1 Trial 2 Trial 3 Mean

50 0.46 0.35 0.49 0.43

100 0.50 0.38 0.62 0.50

150 0.42 0.64 0.57 0.54

200 0.68 0.59 0.60 0.62

250 0.58 0.79 0.75 0.71

300 0.90 0.86 0.84

(i) Calculate the mean time for the last row in the table.
(2)

mean time = .............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(ii) The students think that some of their time readings are anomalous.
State how the students should deal with these anomalous readings.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Explain which distance in the table is likely to give the most accurate value for
the speed of sound in air.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 10 marks)

7
 *P70714A0724* Turn over
4 A racing car uses an engine and an electric motor to power its wheels.

(Source: Jens Mommens/Shutterstock)

(a) The electric motor can only operate at maximum power for part of each lap of
the race.
The electric motor has a maximum power output of 1.2 × 105 W.
The electric motor transfers 4.0 × 106 J of energy when it operates at
maximum power.
Calculate the amount of time the electric motor can operate at maximum power.
(3)

time = .............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

8
*P70714A0824* 
(b) The diagram shows a simplified view of a direct current (d.c.) electric motor.

N S

commutator

brush

brush
+
–

(i) State what is meant by the term direct current.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain the purpose of the brushes and the commutator in the d.c. motor.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
 *P70714A0924* Turn over
(c) The electric motor in the racing car can also be used as a generator to charge a
battery pack. It is known as a motor generator unit (MGU).
The rotating wheels of the car cause the magnets in the MGU to spin near a coil
of wire.
This induces a current in the coil when the coil is connected to the battery pack.
(i) Name the energy store of the battery pack that increases when the
battery pack is being charged.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Explain why the kinetic energy store of the car must decrease when the MGU
charges the battery pack.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 11 marks)

10
*P70714A01024* 
5 This question is about nuclear fusion.
(a) The incomplete nuclear equation shows the fusion of two isotopes of hydrogen.

2
1
H + 31H → 42He + X
(i) Identify particle X in the nuclear equation.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Each fusion reaction releases approximately 3 × 10–12 J of energy.

Estimate how many reactions are needed to produce 1 J of energy.
Give your answer to 1 significant figure.
(2)

number of reactions = .......... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Explain why this fusion reaction will only happen at high temperature and
high pressure.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P70714A01224* 
(b) A tokamak is an experimental nuclear fusion reactor.
Strong magnetic fields are used to contain the reactants inside the tokamak.
(i) The diagram shows a positively charged hydrogen nucleus in a uniform
magnetic field directed out of the page.

magnetic field
out of page

force

positively charged
hydrogen nucleus

The nucleus experiences a force acting to the left because of the

magnetic field.
Deduce how the nucleus must behave to experience this force.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Suggest how engineers working on the tokamak could increase the force on
the nucleus.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

13
 *P70714A01324* Turn over
6 (a) State what is meant by the astronomical term galaxy.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Which of these is a large collection of billions of galaxies?

(1)
A a nebula

B a red giant

C the solar system

D the universe

(c) Hydrogen is an element that can emit visible light waves.

The table shows the wavelength of one of these waves when detected from
a laboratory sample of hydrogen and when detected from the hydrogen in
two different galaxies.
The detected wavelengths from the galaxies are different from the detected
wavelength from the laboratory sample because of the Doppler effect.

Wavelength in nm

Laboratory sample 656.45

Galaxy A 656.21

Galaxy B 657.81

14
*P70714A01424* 
(i) Galaxy A and galaxy B are both moving relative to Earth.
Compare the motions of galaxy A and galaxy B relative to Earth.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Use data from the table to calculate the speed of galaxy B relative to Earth.
[speed of light, c = 3.0 × 108 m/s]
(4)

speed = ...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(Total for Question 6 = 9 marks)

15
 *P70714A01524* Turn over
7 A student investigates the rate of cooling of water in a beaker.

The student pours boiling water into a beaker and monitors the temperature of the
water for a period of time.
The graph shows the student’s results.

Temperature
in °C 70

50
0 100 200 300 400 500 600
Time in s

16
*P70714A01624* 
(a) The rate of cooling is represented by the gradient of the graph and is measured
in °C/s.
By drawing a tangent to the curve, determine the rate of cooling of the water
at 70 °C.
(4)

rate of cooling = ....................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C/s

(b) The student repeats the investigation with the same beaker wrapped in
woollen insulation.

Sketch another line on the graph to show the expected results when the beaker is
wrapped in woollen insulation.
Assume that the starting temperature of the water is 82 °C.
(2)

(Total for Question 7 = 6 marks)

17
 *P70714A01724* Turn over
8 Diagram 1 shows a machine used for demonstrating electrostatics.

+ +
+ +
+ +
metal dome
+ +

+ +

rubber belt

spindle handle

Diagram 1

(a) When the handle is turned, the dome becomes positively charged.
(i) In terms of electron movement, give a reason why the metal dome becomes
positively charged.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P70714A01824* 
(ii) When the handle is turned for 15 s the dome gains 0.50 J of energy in its
electrostatic store as it becomes charged.
The voltage between the dome and the earth is 120 kV.
Calculate the mean charging current during this time.
(3)

mean charging current = ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

19
 *P70714A01924* Turn over
(b) The metal dome is discharged.
A thin metal case is then placed on top of the metal dome, as shown in Diagram 2.

thin metal case

metal dome

Diagram 2

(i) When the handle is turned, the thin metal case moves upwards away from
the dome.
Explain why the thin metal case starts to move upwards.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20
*P70714A02024* 
(ii) Explain why the metal case reaches a maximum height above the
metal dome.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 11 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
 *P70714A02124*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P
June 2022
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

*P70953A0124*
P70953A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P70953A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 A student uses a watt-meter to measure the power of

electrically‑operated appliances.

(a) State what is meant by the term power.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P70953A0424* 
(b) The student measures the mean power output (in watts) for six
different appliances.
Diagram 1 shows their results.

Toaster = 1068 W
Kettle = 2025 W
Laptop = 47 W
Electric drill = 713 W
Television = 59 W
Hair dryer = 1511 W

Diagram 1

Draw a results table for the student’s results.

(2)

5
 *P70953A0524* Turn over
(c) The student measures the power output for a different appliance.
Diagram 2 shows their raw data.

199 W 202 W 201 W

213 W 200 W 201 W

Diagram 2

(i) The student identifies an anomalous result in their data.

Draw a circle around the anomalous result.
(1)
(ii) Calculate the mean power output for this appliance.
Give your answer to three significant figures.
(3)

mean power output = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

6
*P70953A0624* 
2 This question is about momentum.
(a) Which of these is the correct unit for momentum?
(1)
A kg / m / s

B kg2 m / s

C kg m / s2

D kg m / s

(b) The diagram shows an object before and after an explosion.

The object breaks into two parts, P and Q.
The parts move away from each other in opposite directions.

object stationary v P Q 3.7 m / s

4.8 kg 2.9 kg 1.9 kg

Before After

(i) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of momentum.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the velocity of part P after the explosion.
(3)

velocity = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

8
*P70953A0824* 
(c) A child drops an egg from a height of 10 cm and the egg lands on the floor.
Explain why the egg is less likely to break if the floor is covered with a thick carpet
than if the floor were covered in hard tiles.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

9
 *P70953A0924* Turn over
3 Mobile phone charger X contains a transformer and is used to charge the
phone’s battery.
Diagram 1 shows the information on charger X.

Input voltage = 230 V

Output voltage = 5.0 V
Output current = 1.2 A

Diagram 1

(a) (i) The power of the charger can be calculated using the formula

power = current × voltage

Calculate the output power of charger X.

(2)

output power = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W

(ii) Calculate the input current to charger X.
Assume that charger X is 100% efficient.
(3)

input current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

10
*P70953A01024* 
(b) Charger X transfers a charge of 10 500 C to the mobile phone battery.
(i) State the formula linking charge, current and time.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the time in minutes to transfer a charge of 10 500 C to the battery.
(3)

time = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . minutes

(iii) Charger Y can also be used to charge the mobile phone battery.
Diagram 2 shows the information label for charger Y.

Input voltage = 230 V

Output voltage = 5.0 V
Output current = 2.1 A

Diagram 2

Explain how the time taken to transfer the same amount of charge to the
mobile phone battery will be affected when charger Y is used instead of
charger X.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
 *P70953A01124* Turn over
(c) Both chargers contain step-down transformers.
Explain how a step-down transformer works.
You may include a diagram to support your answer.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 15 marks)

12
*P70953A01224* 
4 Sound waves with a frequency above the range of human hearing are known
as ultrasound.
(a) State the frequency range for human hearing.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The frequency of ultrasound waves can be determined using an oscilloscope.

(i) Give the name of the piece of apparatus that could be connected to the
oscilloscope to detect the ultrasound waves.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The time period of the ultrasound waves must be measured to determine
their frequency.
Describe how the oscilloscope is used to measure the time period of the
ultrasound waves.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P70953A01424* 
(c) The diagram shows the oscilloscope screen when an ultrasound wave is detected.
The oscilloscope settings are also shown.

oscilloscope settings:
y direction: 1 square = 2 V
x direction: 1 square = 5 × 10−6 s

(i) Determine the time period of the ultrasound waves.

(2)

time period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(ii) Calculate the frequency of the ultrasound waves.
(2)

frequency = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

15
 *P70953A01524* Turn over
5 (a) The table gives some statements about different parts of a nuclear reactor.
Place ticks () in the boxes to show which statements are about the moderator
and which statements are about a control rod in a nuclear reactor.
(3)

Moderator Control rod

absorbs excess neutrons

can be made of boron

can be made of water or graphite

is lowered into or raised from the reactor

core to adjust the rate of reaction
reduces the speed of neutrons so they are
more likely to cause fission

(b) Describe the role of shielding around a nuclear reactor.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P70953A01624* 
(c) A uranium fuel rod is made from fuel pellets that contain uranium‑235 and
uranium‑238.
Only uranium‑235 undergoes nuclear fission in the reactor core.
Energy is released when the uranium‑235 nuclei undergo fission.
The box gives some data about a typical uranium fuel pellet.

Total mass of uranium in fuel pellet 0.0088 kg

Percentage (by mass) of uranium‑235 in fuel pellet 3.0 %

Mass of uranium‑235 atom 3.90 × 10−25 kg

Total energy released from fuel pellet due to fission 2.17 × 1010 J

(i) Calculate the number of uranium‑235 atoms in the fuel pellet.

(2)

number of uranium‑235 atoms = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the energy released when the nucleus of a single atom of
uranium‑235 undergoes fission.
(2)

energy released = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

17
 *P70953A01724* Turn over
6 The universe began with an event known as the Big Bang.
(a) Describe how the size and temperature of the universe have changed since
the Big Bang.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Discuss two pieces of evidence that support the Big Bang theory.
(6)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

18
*P70953A01824* 
7 This question is about specific heat capacity.
(a) State what is meant by the term specific heat capacity.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A student uses this method to measure the specific heat capacity of water.
• place an aluminium block of known mass in an oven at a temperature
of 220 °C
• place water of known mass in a container at a temperature of 20 °C
• leave the aluminium block in the oven for 10 minutes
• remove the aluminium block from the oven and place the block in the water
• measure the maximum temperature of the water after it has been heated by
the aluminium block
The student uses their data to calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
Give two ways that they could improve their method to increase the accuracy of
their value of specific heat capacity.
(2)

1 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
 *P70953A01924* Turn over
(c) The box shows the student’s data.

Mass of aluminium block = 1.6 kg

Mass of water = 2.3 kg
Initial temperature of water = 20 °C
Maximum temperature of water = 38 °C

(i) When the water reaches its maximum temperature, the water and
aluminium block are in thermal equilibrium.
State the temperature of the aluminium block as it reaches thermal
equilibrium with the water.
(1)

temperature of aluminium = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(ii) Calculate the temperature change of the water when it has been heated to its
maximum temperature.
(1)

temperature change of water = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . °C

(iii) The water gains 190 000 J of energy in its thermal store as it is heated to its
maximum temperature.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
(3)

specific heat capacity of water = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J / kg °C

20
*P70953A02024* 
(d) After finishing the experiment, the student removes the aluminium block and
places the container of water into a freezer.
The water loses energy at a constant rate and cools from 38 °C to –20 °C.
The water freezes and turns into ice at 0 °C.
Ice has a lower specific heat capacity than water.
Use the axes to sketch a temperature-time graph from when the water is placed
in the freezer until it reaches its lowest temperature.
No calculations are required.
(4)

20
Temperature
in °C
10

0
Time

−10

−20

(Total for Question 7 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
 *P70953A02124*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR
June 2022
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

*P70954A0124*
P70954A
©2022 Pearson Education Ltd.

Q:1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P70954A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 The Hertzsprung–Russell diagram shows stars classified into different regions.

B
Absolute
magnitude
C

Colour

(a) The boxes give four points, A, B, C and D, and four star classifications.
Draw lines connecting each point to the correct star classification.
(4)
Point Star classification

A star similar to the Sun

B white dwarf

C red giant

D very bright blue star

4
*P70954A0424* 
(b) Describe what is meant by the term absolute magnitude.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
 *P70954A0524* Turn over
2 (a) Describe an investigation to determine the speed of sound.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P70954A0624* 
(b) A microphone is connected to an oscilloscope.
A sound is detected by the microphone.
The diagram shows the oscilloscope trace.

Oscilloscope settings
y direction: 1 square = 0.1 V
x direction: 1 square = 5.0 ms

(i) Determine the period of the sound wave.

(3)

period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s
(ii) Calculate the frequency of the sound wave.
(2)

frequency = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

7
 *P70954A0724* Turn over
3 The SPS is a particle accelerator in Geneva.
The SPS can accelerate sulfur particles to speeds almost as fast as the speed of light.
(a) Neutral sulfur particles can become positively charged sulfur particles.
Describe the difference between a neutral sulfur particle and a positively charged
sulfur particle.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Diagram 1 shows a section of the SPS.

positive negative
plate plate

Diagram 1

Positively charged sulfur particles are introduced at point P and accelerate to

the right.
Explain why the positively charged sulfur particles accelerate.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P70954A0824* 
(c) The sulfur particles enter a large tube and complete a circular orbit.
Diagram 2 shows a sulfur particle, travelling with velocity v, in the tube.

Diagram 2

(i) A magnetic force acts on the positively charged sulfur particle.

This force makes the particle travel in a circle.
The force is labelled F.
Use the left-hand rule to determine the direction of the applied
magnetic field.
(1)
A opposite to the direction of the velocity

B along direction of force

C out of the page

D into the page

(ii) The tube has a radius of 1.1 km and the sulfur particle has an orbital speed
of 2.9 × 108 m/s.
Calculate the orbital period of the sulfur particle.
(3)

orbital period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

9
 *P70954A0924* Turn over
4 A student heats a sample of water.
The student measures the temperature of the sample of water during heating.
(a) The sample of water has a mass of 0.45 kg.
Calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the water
from 16 °C to 100 °C.
[specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J / kg °C]
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
(b) The diagram shows the temperature-time graph for the sample of water.

200

160

120
Temperature
in °C
80

0
0 2 4 6 8 10

Time in minutes

10
*P70954A01024* 
(i) Use the graph to determine the time taken from when the water started to
boil to when the water stopped boiling.
(1)

time taken = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . minutes

(ii) The heater used to heat the water has a power rating of 2200 W.
Calculate the energy required to boil all of the water.
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J
(c) Give a reason why the liquid water should be stirred during the heating.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) When water boils, the liquid water becomes a gas called steam.
Describe the changes in arrangement and motion of the molecules in liquid water
and the molecules in steam.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 12 marks)

11
 *P70954A01124* Turn over
5 The diagram shows part of the National Grid.

pylon

power station

step-up
transformer

(a) There is a step-up transformer at the power station end of a transmission line and
a step-down transformer at a distant town.
Explain why step-up transformers and step-down transformers are used in
this way.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
*P70954A01224* 
(b) (i) State the formula linking the input voltage, the output voltage and the
turns ratio for a transformer.
(1)

(ii) The primary coil on a step-up transformer has 3300 turns.

Calculate the number of turns required on the transformer’s secondary coil to
step up the voltage from 15 kV to 340 kV.
(3)

number of turns = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13
 *P70954A01324* Turn over
(c) Transformers in the National Grid have efficiencies less than 100%.
(i) Suggest which energy store of the transformer increases as a result of the
efficiency being less than 100%.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The iron core of a transformer is an electrical conductor.

When the transformer is in use, the primary coil causes a changing
magnetic field in the iron core. This causes a small current to be induced in
the core.
Explain how a current is induced in the core of the transformer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 12 marks)

14
*P70954A01424* 
6 The refractive index, n, of a material can be calculated using this formula.

sin(i )
n=
sin(r )

(a) A student uses this method to determine the refractive index of a material.
• draw around a semi-circular block of material
• shine a light ray towards the centre of the straight edge of the
semi‑circular block
• use a pencil and a ruler to mark the positions of the incident ray and the
refracted ray
• remove the block
• draw a normal where the ray was incident on the block
• measure the angle of incidence and angle of refraction
• calculate the refractive index using the formula
Repeat the method for different angles of incidence.
(i) Name the independent variable in this investigation.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The table shows the student’s results for an angle of incidence of 40°.

Angle of refraction 1 (°) Angle of refraction 2 (°) Angle of refraction 3 (°)

22 23 67

Calculate the mean value for the angle of refraction.

(2)

mean angle = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . degrees

16
*P70954A01624* 
(iii) Describe how the student could improve their method to get a more accurate
value for the refractive index.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Diagram 1 shows a ray of light refracted by a transparent block of material.

82°
air

material
47°

Diagram 1

(i) Calculate the refractive index of this material.

(2)

refractive index = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
 *P70954A01724* Turn over
(ii) State the formula linking critical angle and refractive index.
(1)

(iii) The refractive index of a different material is 1.7

Calculate the critical angle of this material.
(2)

critical angle = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . degrees

Diagram 2

The optical fibre is made of a material with a refractive index of 1.7

Explain the path of the ray in the optical fibre.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 12 marks)

18
*P70954A01824* 
7 Diagram 1 shows a gate fitted with a spring mechanism.
The spring mechanism shuts the gate automatically.

gate

spring
mechanism

Diagram 1

(a) The graph shows some data from an investigation into how the extension of the
spring changes with an increasing force.

30
Extension
in cm
20

0
0 100 200 300 400 500

Force in N

Describe the relationship shown by the graph.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20
*P70954A02024* 
(b) Diagram 2 shows the gate viewed from above.

F
320 cm
pivot 84 cm

spring gate
mechanism
480 N

Diagram 2

The force the spring exerts on the gate is 480 N.

Show that the moment of the force the spring exerts on the gate is about 400 Nm.
(2)

force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N
(d) The spring is removed for testing.
Explain what will happen to the spring if the force applied to extend the spring is
too large.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 10 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
 *P70954A02124*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P
January 2023
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball‑point pen.
• Fill in theis boxes
If pencil used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centre number andat candidate
the top of this page with your name,
number.
• Answer all questions.
• – there may
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

*P71898A0120*
P71898A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

J:1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P71898A0220* 
Answer ALL questions.

1 The photograph shows a person using a roll of plastic wrapping to cover a plate
of food.
The plastic wrapping sticks to the plate due to electrostatic charges.

(Source: © [Link]/Shutterstock)

The passage explains why the plastic wrapping sticks to the plate.
Use words from the box to complete the passage.
Each word may be used once, more than once, or not at all.

attract electrons negative neutral

neutrons positive protons repel

The person pulls a layer of plastic wrapping from the roll.

Forces between the layers of wrapping transfer particles called ........................................................... . . .

from one layer to another layer.

The layer gaining these particles acquires a .............................................................. charge.

The layer losing these particles acquires a .............................................................. charge.

The negatively charged layer of wrapping repels .............................................................. in the plate,

leaving a positive charge in the plate where it touches the plastic wrapping.

The wrapping and plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................... due to them having opposite charges.

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
 *P71898A0320* Turn over
2 The photograph shows an ice cube placed on a metal tile.
The solid ice cube melts to become liquid water.

ice cube metal tile

water

(a) Compare the arrangement of particles in a solid with the arrangement of particles
in a liquid.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
*P71898A0420* 
(b) Describe the difference in the movement of particles in a solid compared with the
movement of particles in a liquid.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) After the ice cube has melted, the liquid water increases in temperature.
The water has a mass of 16 g and a specific heat capacity of 4200 J/kg °C.
Calculate the energy transferred to the liquid water as it increases in temperature
from 3 °C to 21 °C.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

5
 *P71898A0520* Turn over
3 Kori Nuclear Power Plant in South Korea is one of the world’s largest nuclear fission
power stations.

(Source: © seo byeong gon/Shutterstock)

(a) The reactors at Kori use nuclear fission to generate electricity.

The products released during nuclear fission have high energy in their
kinetic store.
Give a product of nuclear fission.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Give two disadvantages of using nuclear fission to generate electricity.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P71898A0620* 
(c) Kori has a maximum power output of 7.49 × 109 W.
(i) State what is meant by the term power.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the minimum time taken for Kori to transfer 6.47 × 1014 J of energy.
(3)

minimum time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(Total for Question 3 = 7 marks)

7
 *P71898A0720* Turn over
4 A squash ball is made of rubber and used to play a game called squash.

(Source: © mexrix/Shutterstock)

A student observes that the squash ball bounces higher after its
temperature increases.
The student designs an investigation to see how the temperature of the ball affects
the maximum height after it bounces.

(a) State the independent and dependent variables in the student’s investigation.
(2)
independent variable

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dependent variable

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows the ball at its maximum height after it bounces.
Determine the distance the ball moves from the floor to its maximum height.
Assume the ball does not change shape when it bounces.
[1 cm on diagram = 4 cm in laboratory]
(2)

squash ball

floor

distance = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm
8
*P71898A0820* 
(c) Design a method that the student could use to investigate how the temperature
of the ball affects the maximum height after it bounces.
Your answer should include details of
• apparatus needed
• measurements required
• control variables
You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(6)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

9
 *P71898A0920* Turn over
5 Diagram 1 shows a wooden plank balanced horizontally on two supports, A and B.
A block is suspended from the plank between the supports by a cable of
negligible weight.

force F
25 cm 55 cm

plank
A B
cable

block

Diagram 1

(a) The weight of the block is 260 N.

(i) State the formula linking moment, force and perpendicular distance from
the pivot.
(1)

(ii) By taking moments about support A, calculate force F.

Assume the weight of the plank is negligible.
(3)

force F = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

10
*P71898A01020* 
(iii) Explain what will happen to the magnitude of force F if the block is moved
towards support B.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
 *P71898A01120* Turn over
(b) Diagram 2 shows the block and the cable connecting the block to the plank.

cable

block

Diagram 2

(i) The centre of gravity of the block is located at point X.

Draw an arrow on diagram 2 to show the weight of the block.
(2)

12
*P71898A01220* 
(ii) The block also experiences a force due to the tension in the cable.
Explain why the block remains stationary when it is supported by this
tension force.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Explain why the forces acting on the block are not an example of Newton’s
third law of motion.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 13 marks)

13
 *P71898A01320* Turn over
6 This question is about magnetic fields.
(a) A student positions a thick wire vertically through the centre of a horizontal card.
The student then passes a constant current through the wire in the downward
direction, as shown in diagram 1.

Diagram 1

(i) On diagram 1, draw the shape and direction of the magnetic field produced
by the current in the wire.
(3)

(ii) Describe a method the student could use to show the shape of the magnetic
field produced by the current in the wire.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P71898A01420* 
(b) The student then removes the card and sets up a second wire next to the first
wire, as shown in diagram 2.

first second
wire wire

Diagram 2

The current in both wires is in the downward direction.

The student observes that the wires move towards each other.
Explain why the wires move towards each other.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 8 marks)

15
 *P71898A01520* Turn over
7 A student uses this method to investigate the speed of sound in air.
• set up an oscilloscope to detect and display a sound wave
• use a computer and a speaker to produce a sound of known wavelength
• use the oscilloscope to determine the frequency of the sound wave
• use a formula to calculate the speed of sound

(a) Give the name of the equipment that should be connected to the oscilloscope to
detect the sound wave.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows the oscilloscope screen and the oscilloscope settings.

Oscilloscope settings

y direction: 1 square = 5 mV

x direction: 1 square = 0.5 ms

16
*P71898A01620* 
(i) Determine the frequency of the sound wave.
(4)

frequency = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

(ii) The wavelength of the sound wave is 27 cm.

Calculate the speed of sound.
(3)

speed of sound = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m/s

(iii) Describe how the oscilloscope could be adjusted to show fewer wave cycles
on the screen.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 10 marks)

17
 *P71898A01720* Turn over
8 A binary star system has two nearby stars, which orbit each other in a circular path
around a common centre of gravity.

star

common centre of gravity

star

(a) In an eclipsing binary system, one star passes behind the other star in its orbit.
This causes a decrease in the light intensity of the binary star system when
viewed from Earth.
The graph shows how the light intensity of the binary star system changes
with time.

Light
intensity

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Time in years

(i) Suggest why the decreases in light intensity are not all the same.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Use the graph to determine the time period of the binary star system.
(1)

time period = ......................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . years

18
*P71898A01820* 
(iii) One of the stars in this binary system has an orbital speed of 19 km/s.
Calculate the orbital radius of this star.
(4)

orbital radius = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km

(b) A different binary star system is in a distant galaxy.

When observed from the Earth, light from this galaxy has a longer wavelength
than the wavelength of the light when it is emitted from the galaxy.
Explain why this gives evidence for the Big Bang theory.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 9 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

19
 *P71898A01920*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR
January 2023
You must have: Total Marks
Ruler, calculator

Turn over

*P71899A0124*
P71899A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

J:1/1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P71899A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.

Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 The diagram is an incomplete Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram which astronomers use to

compare stars.

Colour

(a) The y‑axis label is missing.

Which of these is the correct label for the y‑axis?
(1)
A absolute magnitude
B apparent magnitude

C scalar magnitude

D vector magnitude

4
*P71899A0424* 
(b) The box contains words to identify the shaded areas P, Q and R on the
Hertzsprung‑Russell diagram.

white dwarfs main sequence red giants

black holes supernovae dwarf planets

Use words from the box to identify P, Q and R.

(3)

P. ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Q............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

R. ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
 *P71899A0524* Turn over
2 This is a question about electromagnetic waves.
(a) State which colour in the visible spectrum has the shortest wavelength.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain a hazard of ultraviolet radiation to the human body.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Calculate the frequency of radio waves with a wavelength of 15 m.

[speed of light = 300 000 000 m/s]
(2)

frequency = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

(Total for Question 2 = 6 marks)

6
*P71899A0624* 
3 A tumble dryer is a household device that dries clothes.
The clothes rotate in a heated cylinder.
Clothes often stick together when they are dry because they become
electrostatically charged.
A student investigates how different materials charge electrostatically in a model
tumble dryer.
The diagram shows the model tumble dryer.

direction of rotation

cylinder

squares of
material

This is the student’s method.

• put four dry squares of the same material into the cylinder
• rotate the cylinder at constant speed for three minutes
• remove any squares that are stuck together
• measure the force needed to pull the squares apart
• repeat this for squares of different material

(a) (i) Name a device the student could use to measure a force.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the independent and dependent variables in this investigation.

(2)

independent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

dependent. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) State a control variable in this investigation.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P71899A0824* 
(b) Explain how the squares of material stick together.
Use ideas about electrostatic charge in your answer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The table shows some of the student’s results.

Mean force to separate squares

Material
in N

wool 5.4

polyester 3.2

acrylic 6.5

Explain which type of graph is the most appropriate to present the results from
this investigation.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
 *P71899A0924* Turn over
(d) (i) State the formula linking charge, current and time.
(1)

(ii) When the squares of material are pulled apart there is a small spark.
There is a current of 4.3 × 10–6 A in the air for a time of 2.3 × 10–3 s.
Calculate the charge that is transferred.
(2)

charge = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

(Total for Question 3 = 12 marks)

10
*P71899A01024* 
4 Diagram 1 shows a circuit built by a student.

83 mA
17 Ω

6.2 Ω
228 mA

Diagram 1

(a) (i) State the formula linking voltage, current and resistance.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the voltage across the 17 Ω resistor.

(3)

voltage = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(iii) State the voltage across the 6.2 Ω resistor.

(1)

voltage = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(iv) Calculate the current in the battery.

(2)

current = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA

12
*P71899A01224* 
(b) Diagram 2 shows a second circuit built by the student using the same battery
and resistors.

17 Ω 6.2 Ω

Diagram 2

Explain how the current in the battery will change now the resistors are
connected in series.
You do not need to do any calculations in your answer.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

13
 *P71899A01324* Turn over
5 A transformer is used to charge a mobile phone.
The diagram shows a label on the transformer.

input voltage: 230 V

input current: 0.067 A

output voltage: 5.0 V

output current: 3.1 A

(a) Explain how the information in the label shows that the transformer is a
step‑down transformer.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Show that the transformer is approximately 100% efficient.

(3)

14
*P71899A01424* 
(c) (i) State the formula linking input voltage, output voltage and turns ratio for
a transformer.
(1)

(ii) The primary coil has 1500 turns.

Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
(3)

turns on secondary coil = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

15
 *P71899A01524* Turn over
6 This question is about the use of water in central heating systems.

(a) A student does an investigation to find the specific heat capacity of water.
This is the list of equipment they use.
• heater with a power output of 50 W
• power supply
• beaker
• water
• thermometer
• stopwatch
• connecting leads
• balance

16
*P71899A01624* 
Describe an investigation the student could use to find the specific heat capacity
of water.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
 *P71899A01724* Turn over
(b) The diagram shows a simplified central heating system viewed from above.

radiator
boiler

house
radiator
pipe

radiator

Pipes transport hot water around a house to radiators and back to the boiler.
The boiler heats water from 16 °C to 65 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the boiler to 75 kg of water to raise the
temperature of the water from 16 °C to 65 °C.
[for water, specific heat capacity = 4200 J/kg °C]
(3)

energy = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

18
*P71899A01824* 
(ii) The radiators transfer energy from the water to the air in the house.
The temperature of the water in the heating system decreases by 4 °C due to
heat transferred to the air.
This causes the air in the house to increase in temperature by 15 °C.
The mass of air in the house and the mass of water in the heating system are
approximately the same.
Explain why there is a larger temperature change in the air.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 11 marks)

19
 *P71899A01924* Turn over
7 A crumple zone is a safety feature in a car.
It is a part of the car that is designed to collapse during a collision.
A student investigates the effectiveness of crumple zones.
The student rolls two model cars down a ramp.
Each car comes to rest when it hits a large metal block.
A data logger measures the mean force applied to the car during the collision with
the block.
The diagram shows the equipment used in the investigation.

data
logger
metal
ramp block 0.0 N

Car 1 has a paper crumple zone at the front.

Car 2 has no paper crumple zone.
The table shows the student’s results.

Mean force on car from block Velocity just before car hits block
Car
in N in m/s

1 2.5 3.0

2 4.9 3.0

(a) The mass of each car is 0.074 kg.

Calculate the time taken for the velocity of car 1 to decrease from 3.0 m/s
to 0.0 m/s.
(3)

time taken = ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

20
*P71899A02024* 
(b) State the magnitude and direction of the force on the metal block, when car 2
collides with the block.
(2)

magnitude = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 7 marks)

21
 *P71899A02124* Turn over
8 Between 1929 and 1931, physicists Hubble and Humason investigated the red‑shift of
light from galaxies at different distances from the Earth.
The distance unit they used is the megaparsec (Mpc).
(a) Describe what is meant by the term red‑shift.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The graph shows some of the results of their investigation.

0.10

0.08

0.06
Change in
wavelength
in nm
0.04

0.02

0.00
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Distance in Mpc

(i) Draw a circle to show the anomalous data point.

(1)

(ii) Draw the line of best fit on the graph.

(1)

22
*P71899A02224* 
(iii) The reference wavelength of the light used in this investigation is 660 nm.
Use information from the graph to determine the velocity of a galaxy at a
distance of 0.75 Mpc.
[speed of light = 300 000 km/s]
(3)

velocity = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/s

(iv) Explain why the graph from Hubble’s investigation provides evidence for the
expansion of the universe.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 9 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
 *P71899A02324*
Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 16 June 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, protractor, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
•• IfFillpencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 70.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
•• Write your answers neatly and in good English.
Try to answer every question.
• Check your answers if you have time at the end.
Turn over

P71957A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.
N:1/1/1/1/
*P71957A0124*
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P71957A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an

B 16 g

C 160 g

D 1600 g

(b) The diagram shows the pencil with one end resting on a small block.
F
7.4 cm pivot

3.7 cm
0.16 N

A finger provides an upwards force, F, to keep the pencil horizontal.

(i) The weight of the pencil is 0.16 N.
Calculate the moment of the weight of the pencil about the pivot.
Use the formula

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

(2)

moment = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N cm

4
*P71957A0424* 
(ii) State the moment of the force F.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

moment = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N cm
(iii) Show that force F is 0.080 N.
(2)

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
 *P71957A0524* Turn over
2 A solid bar of chocolate is taken from a refrigerator.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(Source: © MarySan/Shutterstock)

(a) The temperature of the chocolate bar is 5 °C.

Describe the arrangement and motion of the particles inside the chocolate bar.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The chocolate is heated at a constant rate until the temperature reaches 45 °C.
The chocolate has a melting point of 32 °C and a boiling point of 55 °C.
(i) Describe the motion of the particles in the chocolate when the chocolate is at
a temperature of 45 °C.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Which of these is used to measure the temperature of the chocolate?

(1)
A balance

B ruler

C stopwatch

D thermometer

6
*P71957A0624* 
(iii) Use the axes to sketch a graph of how the temperature of the chocolate
changes with time when it is heated from 5 °C to 45 °C.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Temperature
25
in °C

Time
(Total for Question 2 = 8 marks)

7
 *P71957A0724* Turn over
3 The diagram shows the inside of an oscilloscope.
Electrons leave the electron supply and accelerate towards the screen.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The stream of electrons hits the screen.

– +

stream of electrons
electron
supply

positively charged screen

grid
(a) The grid is connected to the positive terminal of a high voltage power supply.
(i) Explain, in terms of the movement of particles, how the grid has become
positively charged.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) State the formula linking kinetic energy, mass and speed.
(1)

(iii) Calculate the speed of an electron when it has 1.3 × 10 –15 J of kinetic energy.
The mass of an electron is 9.1 × 10 –31 kg.
(3)

speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

9
 *P71957A0924* Turn over
(b) The stream of electrons spreads out as it travels towards the screen.
Explain why the electrons in the stream move apart from each other.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) The oscilloscope can cause the electrons to move in a circle.

This produces a circular pattern on the screen.

1 cm

(i) Use the scale to determine the radius of the circle.

(1)

radius = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

10
*P71957A01024* 
(ii) The time taken for the electrons to complete one orbit of the circle is 24 ms.
Calculate the orbital speed of the electrons.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Use the formula

2π × orbital radius
orbital speed =
time period
(3)

orbital speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

(Total for Question 3 = 12 marks)

11
 *P71957A01124* Turn over
4 The diagram shows two birds, just before bird X catches the smaller bird Y.
Both birds are travelling horizontally at constant velocity.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
bird X

bird Y

velocity = 13 m / s velocity

mass = 0.41 kg
(a) Show that the momentum of bird X is about 5 kg m / s.
(2)

(b) The momentum of bird Y just before it is caught is 0.15 kg m / s.

Calculate the total momentum of the birds just before bird X catches bird Y.
(1)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s
(c) State the total momentum of the birds just after bird X has caught bird Y.
(1)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

12
*P71957A01224* 
(d) Bird Y has a mass of 0.17 kg.
Calculate the velocity of the birds just after bird X has caught bird Y.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

velocity = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s
(Total for Question 4 = 7 marks)

13
 *P71957A01324* Turn over
5 The diagram shows some of the components of a nuclear fission reactor.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
control rod

coolant out

moderator
reactor vessel

fuel rod coolant in

(a) Describe how a chain reaction occurs in a nuclear fission reactor.

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Describe the role of the control rods in a nuclear fission reactor.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P71957A01424* 
(c) Describe how the process of nuclear fission is different from the process of
nuclear fusion.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) (i) Which of these is the name of the nuclear process that is the main energy
source for stars?
(1)
A alpha decay
B fission

C fusion

D gamma decay

(ii) Give a reason why the nuclear process in stars does not happen at low
temperatures and pressures.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 9 marks)

15
 *P71957A01524* Turn over
6 The National Grid is used in the United Kingdom for the large-scale transmission of
electricity. The photograph shows solar panels connected to the National Grid.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(Source: © Jenson/Shutterstock)

(a) Solar panels provide direct current to a device that outputs an alternating current
so that the energy from the solar panels can be supplied to the National Grid.
(i) Explain why a step-up transformer is used to supply the National Grid.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P71957A01624* 
(ii) This is the label on the step-up transformer.

input voltage = 15 kV
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

output voltage = 340 kV

number of turns on primary coil = 1400

State the formula linking input voltage, output voltage and turns ratio for
a transformer.
(1)

(iii) Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil of the

step‑up transformer.
(3)

number of turns = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Solar panels produce constant direct current (d.c.).
Explain why a transformer will not work when connected to constant
direct current.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 9 marks)

17
 *P71957A01724* Turn over
7 (a) A glass prism can be used to refract light.

prism
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

i
r

(i) State the name of the piece of equipment used to measure angles.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Measure the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction for the light
entering the prism.
(2)

angle of incidence = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . degrees

angle of refraction = ................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . degrees

(iii) State the formula linking refractive index, angle of incidence and
angle of refraction.
(1)

(iv) Calculate the refractive index of the glass.

(2)

refractive index = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
 *P71957A01924* Turn over
(b) Two galaxies, A and B, emit red light with a reference wavelength of 630 nm.
An astronomer measures the wavelength of red light from galaxy A when the

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
light arrives at the Earth.
The astronomer’s value for the wavelength is 645 nm.
(i) Calculate the difference between the astronomer’s value for the wavelength
and the reference wavelength of red light.
(1)

difference in wavelength = .................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nm

(ii) The change in wavelength happens because galaxy A is moving away from
the Earth.
Calculate the speed of galaxy A.
[speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m / s]
(3)

speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

20
*P71957A02024* 
(iii) Light from galaxy B has twice the redshift as light from galaxy A.
Galaxy B is twice as far away from Earth as galaxy A.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain how these observations support the Big Bang theory of the origin of
the Universe.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 12 marks)

21
 *P71957A02124* Turn over
8 Concrete on top of buildings can be used to heat water.
The photograph shows a concrete and water heating system being built into the roof

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
of a house.

(Source: © ejhgndrn/Shutterstock)

(a) A scientist wants to determine the specific heat capacity of concrete.

The diagram shows some of the equipment they could use.

12 V
A

lid
insulating material

concrete
thermometer

electrical heater

22
*P71957A02224* 
Describe a suitable method to find the specific heat capacity of concrete.
(5)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain the advantage of the concrete having a high specific heat capacity when
it is used to heat water in the heating system.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
 *P71957A02324*
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Friday 16 June 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

*P71957A*
P71957A
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

N:1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P71957A

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P71957A 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power Vp Ip = Vs Is

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P71957A

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 16 June 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• IfFillpencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• centrein the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

*P71958RA0124*
P71958RA
©2023 Pearson Education Ltd.

N:1/1/1/1/1/
FORMULAE

You may find the following formulae useful.

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P71958RA0224* 
Answer ALL questions.

1 (a) The boxes show some physical quantities and their units.
Draw a straight line from each physical quantity to its correct unit.
One has been done for you.
(3)

Physical quantity Unit

velocity metre per second squared (m / s2)

force watt (W)

power newton (N)

moment metre per second (m / s)

acceleration newton metre (N m)

(b) Some physical quantities are scalars and other physical quantities are vectors.
(i) State the difference between a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Give an example of a scalar quantity.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

3
 *P71958RA0324* Turn over
2 This question is about different methods of generating electricity.
(a) Natural gas can be burned to generate electricity.
Name the energy store that decreases when natural gas is burned.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Burning natural gas and the movement of water waves can both be used to
generate electricity.
Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of these two methods of
generating electricity.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 5 marks)

4
*P71958RA0424* 
3 A cleaning product is applied to a car using a sponge pad.
The sponge pad is rubbed against the car to apply the cleaning product.

(Source: © Nor Gal/Shutterstock)

(a) Some parts of the car are made of metal and other parts are made of plastic.
The metal parts of the car are earthed.
Explain why the pad becomes charged when rubbing the plastic parts, but not
when rubbing the metal parts.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P71958RA0624* 
(b) The sponge pad is held near a metal post that is connected to the ground.
The sponge pad discharges with a small spark through the air to the metal post.
(i) The sponge pad stores 5.0 mJ of energy in its electrostatic store.
The voltage between the sponge pad and the metal post is 6000 V.
Calculate the charge transferred by the spark.
(3)

charge transferred = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C

(ii) The small spark between the sponge pad and the metal post demonstrates
that the sponge pad is charged.
Describe a different experiment that could demonstrate that the sponge pad
is charged.
You may draw a diagram to support your answer.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

7
 *P71958RA0724* Turn over
4 The photograph shows a dummy during a test of the safety features of a car in
a collision.

(Source: © fStop Images GmbH/Alamy Stock Photo)

Before the collision, the dummy in the car is travelling at a velocity of 14 m / s.

The dummy has a momentum of 1100 kg m / s.
(a) (i) State the formula linking momentum, mass and velocity.
(1)

(ii) Show that the mass of the dummy is approximately 80 kg.

(3)

8
*P71958RA0824* 
(b) The dummy is brought to rest during the collision by a mean force of 15 kN.
Calculate the time taken for the dummy to be brought to rest in the collision.
(3)

time taken = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(c) The car being tested is fitted with airbags.

Using ideas about momentum, explain how an airbag reduces the force
experienced by the dummy in the collision.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

9
 *P71958RA0924* Turn over
5 This question is about specific heat capacity.
(a) State what is meant by the term specific heat capacity.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows a sample of solid stearic acid being heated in a boiling tube
using a water bath.

thermometer

support

boiling tube containing

stearic acid

water bath

10
*P71958RA01024* 
The mass of stearic acid in the boiling tube is 58 g.
When the boiling tube is placed in the water bath, the temperature of the stearic
acid increases from 21 °C to 37 °C. The stearic acid does not melt.
As the temperature of the stearic acid increases, an additional 3500 J of energy
needs to be transferred electrically to the water bath.
(i) Using this data, show that the specific heat capacity of the solid stearic acid is
approximately 4 J / g °C.
(3)

(ii) The true value for the specific heat capacity of solid stearic acid is 2.3 J / g °C.
Give a reason for the difference between the value in (i) and the true value.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)

11
 *P71958RA01124* Turn over
6 This question is about electromagnetism.
(a) Diagram 1 shows the magnetic field around a straight section of copper wire.

copper wire

Diagram 1

Explain why the copper wire has the magnetic field shown in the diagram.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A student investigates how the strength of an electromagnet varies with the
current in the electromagnet.
The diagram shows their apparatus.

electromagnet

load

13
 *P71958RA01324* Turn over
This is the student’s method.
• switch on the electromagnet at its maximum current
• place a load of 100 g so that it is held above the floor by the electromagnet
• slowly reduce the current in the electromagnet until the load falls from
the electromagnet
• record the current at which the load falls
• record the current at which the same load falls two more times
Repeat the method for loads of different masses.
(i) Suggest a suitable safety precaution for the student’s investigation.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The table shows the student’s results.

Current at which the load falls in A

Mass of load
in g
1 2 3 Mean

100 0.28 0.31 0.31 0.30

200 0.60 0.57 0.57 0.58

300 0.91 0.90 0.86 0.89

400 1.19 1.23 1.27 1.23

500 1.45 1.57 1.48 1.50

600 1.79 1.84 1.87

Calculate the mean current when the mass of the load was 600 g.
Give your answer to a suitable number of significant figures.
(2)

mean current = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A

14
*P71958RA01424* 
(iii) On the grid, plot a graph of the mean current against the mass of the load.
The scale for the mass axis has been done for you.
(3)
(iv) Draw the line of best fit.
(1)

Current
in A

0 100 200 300 400 500 600

Mass in g

(v) The student predicts that a load of 1.0 kg will fall when the current in the
electromagnet is 3.0 A.
Comment on the student’s prediction.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 12 marks)

15
 *P71958RA01524* Turn over
7 This question is about sound waves.
(a) The table gives the frequencies of some different sound waves.
Place ticks () in the table to show which sound waves can be heard by humans.
(2)

Frequency
Sound wave Can be heard by humans
in Hz

A 10

B 30

C 500

D 2000

E 10 000

F 25 000

(b) The diagram shows the screen of an oscilloscope when a sound wave is detected.
Add to the diagram by drawing the trace of another sound wave that has a lower
pitch and is quieter than the sound wave shown.
(2)

16
*P71958RA01624* 
(c) The speed of sound in air varies with temperature.
A student finds a formula in a textbook that links the speed of sound waves in air
to the temperature of the air, measured in kelvin.

speed of sound in air = (0.606 × temperature in kelvin) + 166

(i) Calculate the speed of sound when the air temperature is 46 °C.
(2)

speed of sound = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

(ii) Calculate the wavelength of a sound wave with a frequency of 15 000 Hz when
the air temperature is 46 °C.
(3)

wavelength = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)

17
 *P71958RA01724* Turn over
8 This question is about stars.
(a) The table gives some information about four stars.

Mass Absolute
Star Colour
in solar masses magnitude

A 0.7 orange +7.5

B 1.0 yellow +4.8

C 2.0 blue +1.4

D 17.1 blue –16.8

(i) Star C is much more powerful than star A.

Stars A and C appear to have the same brightness when viewed from Earth.
Suggest how this is possible.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Using information from the table, explain which star is in the supernova stage
of its evolution.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P71958RA01824* 
(b) Explain how a main sequence star evolves into a supernova.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
 *P71958RA01924* Turn over
(c) Astronomers have used supernovas in distant galaxies to investigate the
expansion of the universe.
(i) Light emitted from a supernova at a wavelength of 7.774 × 10–7 m was
detected at Earth with a wavelength of 7.780 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the speed at which the galaxy containing this supernova was
moving away from the Earth.
[speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m / s]
(4)

speed = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

20
*P71958RA02024* 
(ii) The astronomers investigated supernovas that showed a red-shift in the
wavelengths detected in different galaxies.
The astronomers discovered that the red-shifted light detected from
supernovas in nearby galaxies had shorter wavelengths than the red-shifted
light detected from supernovas in galaxies further away.
Explain how this discovery supports the Big Bang theory.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 15 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

21
 *P71958RA02124*
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Friday 16 June 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

N:1/1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P71958RA

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P71958RA 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power Vp Ip = Vs Is

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P71958RA

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Wednesday 22 November 2023
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
• centrethe
Fill in boxes at the top of this page with your name,
number and candidate number.
• Answer all questions.
• Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

You may find the following formulae useful.

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P73429A0228* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 This question is about nuclear reactions.
(a) Nuclear fusion and nuclear fission release energy from the nuclear stores
of atoms.
The table gives some statements about nuclear fusion and some statements
about nuclear fission.
Place ticks () in the table to show whether each statement applies to nuclear
fusion or nuclear fission.
(3)

Statement Nuclear fusion Nuclear fission

happens in the cores of stars

happens when a nucleus absorbs a neutron

causes a large nucleus to split

produces radioactive daughter nuclei

uses hydrogen to produce helium

4
*P73429A0428* 
(b) In nuclear fusion, two positively charged nuclei must overcome the effects of the
repulsive electrostatic force between them.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain the two conditions needed to overcome the effects of this repulsive force
and achieve nuclear fusion.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

5
 *P73429A0528* Turn over
2 This question is about moments.
Diagram 1 shows the raised lower leg of a person.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
F

0.25 m
0.28 m

weight of
pivot lower leg

0.55 m

Diagram 1

6
*P73429A0628* 
(a) (i) The moment of the weight of the lower leg about the pivot is 19 N m.
A vertical force, F, is applied to the person’s foot to keep the lower leg raised.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The lower leg does not move.

Calculate the magnitude of force F, using the formula

moment = force × perpendicular distance from pivot

(2)

force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

(ii) Which distance is used to calculate the moment of the weight of the lower leg
about the pivot?
(1)
A 0.25 m

B 0.28 m
C 0.30 m

D 0.55 m

7
 *P73429A0728* Turn over
(b) Diagram 2 shows the person resting their lower leg on two supports.

force X force Y

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
support A support B

weight of
lower leg

Diagram 2

8
*P73429A0828* 
(i) The centre of gravity of the lower leg is 0.25 m away from support A and
0.35 m away from support B.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain whether force X or force Y is larger.

Ignore the weight of the upper leg.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) A bag of ice is placed on the lower leg, vertically above the centre of gravity.
This causes force X and force Y to increase.
The bag is then moved towards the person’s foot.
Describe how force X and force Y change as the bag is moved towards the
person’s foot.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 9 marks)

9
 *P73429A0928* Turn over
3 The diagram shows some apparatus that can be used to determine the specific
heat capacity of water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
12V supply
+ –

A
V

lid

beaker
insulating material

water

electrical heater
thermometer

10
*P73429A01028* 
(a) Describe how a student could use this apparatus to determine the specific
heat capacity of water.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Include details of any additional equipment needed in your answer.

(6)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
 *P73429A01128* Turn over
(b) (i) The table shows the student’s results.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
energy transferred to the thermal
54 000
store of the water in J

mass of water in kg 0.56

temperature change of water in °C 22

Use the student’s results to calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
(3)

specific heat capacity of water = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J / kg °C

(ii) Give two reasons why the energy from the heater is not all retained in the
thermal store of the water.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 3 = 11 marks)

12
*P73429A01228* 
4 The diagram shows a step-down transformer.

primary coil secondary coil

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
iron core

16 W output

(a) The input power to the transformer is 16 W.

The transformer is used for 2.5 hours.
Calculate the energy transferred to the transformer during this time.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

14
*P73429A01428* 
(b) Explain how a transformer works.
In your answer, include reasons for using
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

• two coils
• the iron core
• an a.c. power supply
(6)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 10 marks)

15
 *P73429A01528* Turn over
5 A sample of steam (water in a gas state) is cooled using a very cold freezer.
(a) The steam is cooled from an initial temperature of 150 °C.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Calculate the initial temperature of the steam in kelvin (K).
(1)

initial temperature = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

(b) The temperature-time graph shows how the temperature of the steam changes
during the cooling process.
The steam eventually becomes ice (water in a solid state).

Temperature C

Time

(i) The graph shows five stages, A, B, C, D and E, of the cooling process.
State which stages of the cooling process show a change of state.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P73429A01628* 
(ii) Describe the differences in the arrangement of particles when the sample is in
a gas state (steam) and a solid state (ice).
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Explain whether or not the energy in the kinetic store of the particles changes
when the sample is changing state.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 7 marks)

17
 *P73429A01728* Turn over
6 This question is about momentum and forces.
(a) State the principle of conservation of momentum.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows an air track that can be used to investigate motion
without friction.
Air comes out through a series of small holes in the air track. The air lifts the glider
slightly above the track.
A small spacecraft engine floats at rest on a cushion of air.

spacecraft engine

glider
air in
air holes

(i) State the momentum of the spacecraft engine when it is at rest.

(1)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

(ii) The spacecraft engine ejects large numbers of xenon ions to the left.
A mass of 2.6 × 10−8 kg of xenon ions leaves the engine with a mean speed
of 26 km / s.
Calculate the momentum of all the ejected xenon ions.
(3)

momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

18
*P73429A01828* 
(iii) State the magnitude and direction of the spacecraft engine’s momentum after
these xenon ions leave the engine.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

magnitude of momentum = .............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

direction of momentum = ........................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iv) The ions exert a force of 2.6 mN on the spacecraft engine.

The spacecraft engine has a mass of 1.2 kg.
Calculate the acceleration of the engine.
Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
(4)

acceleration = ........................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s2

19
 *P73429A01928* Turn over
(c) The engine is designed to accelerate a spacecraft while the spacecraft is travelling
through space.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The spacecraft carries a mass of 0.75 kg of xenon ions for the engine.
When the engine is used, 9.9 × 10−8 kg of xenon ions leave the engine
each second.
A student suggests that this small spacecraft engine would not be useful because
the acceleration it produces is very small.
Evaluate the student’s suggestion.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 13 marks)

20
*P73429A02028* 
7 The diagram shows the screen of an oscilloscope when a sound wave is detected, and
the oscilloscope settings.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
oscilloscope settings:
y direction: 1 square = 5.0 V
x direction: 1 square = 0.0020 s

(a) Give the name of the piece of equipment that is connected to the oscilloscope to
detect the sound wave.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) (i) Use the trace on the oscilloscope to determine the time period of the
detected sound wave.
(2)

time period = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(ii) Calculate the frequency of the detected sound wave.

(1)

frequency = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz

22
*P73429A02228* 
(c) (i) State the formula linking energy transferred, charge and voltage.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) The effective voltage of the oscilloscope trace can be calculated using
the formula

amplitude of trace in V
effective voltage =
2

Use the effective voltage to calculate the energy transferred when 6.3 × 10−5 C
of charge passes through the oscilloscope.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 7 = 8 marks)

23
 *P73429A02328* Turn over
8 This question is about red‑shift.
(a) The diagram shows two identical stars, A and B, orbiting each other.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
direction
of orbit

star A

star B

towards Earth

Light from each star arrives at Earth.

As the stars move in their orbit, the wavelength of the light observed at Earth
changes due to the Doppler effect.
Add an X to the diagram to show the position of star B when the light emitted
from it shows maximum red-shift when detected on Earth.
(1)

24
*P73429A02428* 
(b) Light is received on Earth from a distant galaxy.
The longest wavelength of light arriving at Earth from the galaxy is 561 nm.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A lamp on Earth produces the same light with a wavelength of 550 nm.
Calculate the velocity of the galaxy.
[speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m / s]
(4)

velocity = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s
(Total for Question 8 = 5 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

25
 *P73429A02528*
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Wednesday 22 November 2023
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

Z:1/1/1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P73429A

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P73429A 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power Vp Ip = Vs Is

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P73429A

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2024
Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
•• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 70.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Advice
•• Read each question carefully before you start to answer it.
Write your answers neatly and in good English.
•• Try to answer every question.
Check your answers if you have time at the end.

Turn over

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P75828A0224*
*P73429A0228* 


Answer ALL questions.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .

1 The Hertzsprung-Russell (HR) diagram shown can be used to classify stars.

Absolute
magnitude Q

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Colour

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) Three regions in the HR diagram are labelled P, Q and R.
The boxes show the three regions and different astronomical objects.
Draw a straight line from each region to the type of astronomical object
contained in that region.
(3)

Region Astronomical object

black hole

main sequence star

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

nebula

Q neutron star

red giant star

R
supernova

white dwarf star

4
*P75828A0424* 
(b) Define the term absolute magnitude.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
 *P75828A0524* Turn over
2 A wrench is used to turn a nut.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
nut
28 N

wrench

15 cm

Diagram 1
(Source: [Link]
chrome-1794553030)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The force applied to the wrench is 28 N.
Calculate the moment applied by the wrench on the nut.
Give a suitable unit.
(3)

moment = .............................................................. unit = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) State two changes that could be made to increase the size of the moment
applied to the nut.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

1 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P75828A0624* 
(c) Diagram 2 shows the wrench as it is turned through 90°

28 N
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

15 cm

28 N
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Diagram 2
(Source: [Link]
chrome-1794553030)

(i) The force is applied over a distance that is equal to a quarter of the
circumference of a circle.
The circle has a radius of 15 cm.
Calculate the distance over which the force is applied.
[circumference of circle = 2 ×π ×radius]
(2)

distance = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the work done by the force as the wrench is turned through a
quarter of the circumference of the circle.
(3)

work done = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(Total for Question 2 = 10 marks)

7
 *P75828A0724* Turn over
3 A student investigates how much infrared radiation is absorbed by different surfaces.
(a) The photograph shows some of the equipment available to the student.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
infrared heater

black bottle

silver bottle

thermometers

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8
*P75828A0824* 
The student pours some water into each bottle.
Describe a method the student could use to investigate how the colour of the
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

bottle affects the amount of infrared radiation absorbed by the bottle.

You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(6)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9
 *P75828A0924* Turn over
(b) The student plots a graph to show how the temperature of the water in each
bottle varies with time.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Draw two curves to show the expected variation in temperature of the black
bottle and the silver bottle during the investigation.
Label your curves with the colour of each bottle.
(2)

Temperature

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time

(Total for Question 3 = 8 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

10
*P75828A01024* 
4 This question is about electrostatics.

(a) A polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth, which causes both the rod and the cloth

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
to become charged.

(i) Which of these is the force that causes the rod and the cloth to
become charged?
(1)
A friction

B gravitational

C magnetic

D tension

(ii) The polythene rod becomes negatively charged.

Which of these statements explains how the rod has become
negatively charged?
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A the rod gains electrons

B the rod loses electrons

C the rod gains protons

D the rod loses protons

(b) A student has rods made from different materials.

The student rubs each rod the same way with a cloth.
The student measures the charge gained by each rod three times.
The table shows the results.

Charge in nanocoulombs (nC)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Material
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

1 2 3 Mean

glass +35 +38 +36 +36

ebonite –168 –170 –171 –170

polythene –61 –80 –59

acetate –20 –20 –18 –19

12
*P75828A01224* 
(i) One of the readings for the polythene rod is anomalous.
Circle the anomalous result in the results table.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)
(ii) State how the student should deal with the anomalous result.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Calculate the mean charge for the polythene rod.

(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mean charge = .................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nC

(iv) Describe how the student could use the rods to demonstrate that there are
two different types of electric charge.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

13
 *P75828A01324* Turn over
5 This question is about sound.
(a) State which wave property determines the pitch of a sound.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The bar chart shows the maximum frequency of sound heard by four animals and
a human.

Frequency
in kHz
40

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0
A B C D E

Explain which of the bars is most likely to show the results for a human.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
*P75828A01424* 
(c) A sound wave has a frequency of 500 Hz.
(i) Show that the time period of the sound wave is 2.0 ms.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(3)

(ii) The diagram shows the screen of an oscilloscope.

The timebase of the oscilloscope is 0.50 ms per square.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Draw the trace on the oscilloscope screen when the sound wave is detected.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 5 = 8 marks)

15
 *P75828A01524* Turn over
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA


*P75828A01624*
BLANK PAGE

16
6 This question is about electromagnets.
(a) Describe the construction of a simple electromagnet that is producing a
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

magnetic field.
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

17
 *P75828A01724* Turn over
(b) A proton moves through a uniform magnetic field produced by a
strong electromagnet.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The shaded area in the diagram represents the magnetic field.
The initial velocity, v, of the proton is also shown.

magnetic field acting

into the page

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

proton

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) Use the left-hand rule to determine the direction of the force acting on
the proton.
(1)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P75828A01824* 
(ii) Explain how the force on the proton changes as the proton moves through
the magnetic field.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

You may add to the diagram to help your answer.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Suggest why the velocity of the proton changes.

(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

19
 *P75828A01924* Turn over
7 A hydroelectric power (HEP) station generates electricity from renewable
energy resources.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) State what is meant by the term renewable energy resource.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows the design of a HEP station.

upper lake

tunnel transformer
pylon
direction of

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

water flow turbine lower lake

generator

Water flows from the upper lake to the lower lake through the turbine.
The turbine is connected to a generator, which generates electricity.
Describe the energy transfers involved in generating electricity in the HEP station.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

20
*P75828A02024* 
(c) The HEP station is located near a large wind farm.
(i) Give one advantage of generating electricity using the HEP station rather than
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

the wind farm.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Give one disadvantage of generating electricity using the HEP station rather
than the wind farm.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) The HEP station has an electric pump that can pump water from the lower
lake back to the upper lake.
The pump can be powered using electricity generated by the wind farm.
Explain how the HEP station and wind farm can be used together to maximise
the effectiveness of generating electricity.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 10 marks)

21
 *P75828A02124* Turn over
8 The photograph shows a water bath that a technician uses to heat some water.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) The water bath is filled with water at an initial temperature of 15 °C.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Calculate the initial temperature of the water in kelvin.
(1)

initial temperature = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P75828A02224* 
(b) The technician heats the water to a final temperature of 60 °C.
(i) Describe how the energy of the water molecules changes as the temperature
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

of the water increases.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The table shows some information about the heating element in the water
bath and the heating process.

Initial temperature of water 15 °C

Final temperature of water 60 °C

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Voltage of heating element 230 V

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Current in heating element 1.5 A

Time taken to heat water 45 minutes

Calculate the energy transferred by the heating element in the water bath
during the heating process.
(3)

energy transferred = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(iii) Calculate the mass of water being heated.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Assume that all the energy is transferred to the thermal store of the water.
[for water, specific heat capacity = 4200 J / kg °C]
(3)

mass of water = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg

QUESTION CONTINUES ON THE NEXT PAGE

23
 *P75828A02324* Turn over
(c) Some water evaporates as a gas from the water bath.
(i) Describe the arrangement of particles in a gas.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Describe two differences between evaporation and boiling.

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 13 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

24
*P75828A02424* 
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Friday 14 June 2024
Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

F:1/1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P75828A

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P75828A 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power V p I p = Vs I s

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P75828A

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Friday 14 June 2024
Afternoon (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

You may find the following formulae useful.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
energy transferred = current × voltage × time E = I×V×t

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred W
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

2
*P73430A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 This question is about stars.
The diagram shows an incomplete Hertzsprung-Russell (H-R) diagram.

............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun

D
B

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

.............................................................................................

(a) Label the axes on the diagram.

(2)
(b) There are three shaded areas on the diagram.
State the name of the shaded area that contains the Sun.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

4
*P73430A0424* 
(c) Which star is a white dwarf?
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(d) At a standard distance from the Earth, which star is brighter than the Sun and has
a greater surface temperature than the Sun?
(1)

D
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(Total for Question 1 = 5 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

5
 *P73430A0524* Turn over
2 This question is about nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
(a) The table gives some statements about nuclear fission, or nuclear fusion, or both

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
Place ticks () in the table to show which statements are about nuclear fission
and which statements are about nuclear fusion.
(3)

Statement Nuclear fission Nuclear fusion

requires high pressure and

high temperature

energy is released

radioactive daughter nuclei

are produced

(b) Nuclear fission reactors use control rods and a moderator.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Describe the function of the control rods and the function of the moderator in a
nuclear fission reactor.
(2)
control rods

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

moderator

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 2 = 5 marks)

6
*P73430A0624* 
3 A sample of liquid gallium is allowed to cool in a laboratory.
The liquid gallium freezes to become a solid.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) Complete the diagram by drawing the arrangement of particles in a liquid and
the arrangement of particles in a solid.
The first particle in each box has been drawn for you.
(4)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Liquid Solid

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

8
*P73430A0824* 
(b) The initial temperature of the sample of liquid gallium is 80 °C.
The freezing temperature of gallium is 30 °C.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The final temperature of the solid gallium is 20 °C.

Complete the graph to show how the temperature of the gallium changes during
the time that it cools to 20 °C.
Add appropriate values to the temperature axis.
(3)

Temperature
in °C
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Time

(Total for Question 3 = 7 marks)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

9
 *P73430A0924* Turn over
4 The photograph shows transmission cables used for long-distance transmission
of electricity.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(a) The diagram shows a power station and a school.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Add to the diagram by drawing the structures needed to efficiently transfer
energy from the power station to the school using electricity.
(3)

Power station School

(b) Explain how the amount of current in the transmission cables increases the
efficiency of the transmission of electricity.
(3)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 6 marks)

10
*P73430A01024* 
5 The diagram shows the collision between two balls, A and B.
The masses and velocities of both balls are shown before and after the collision.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Ball B is stationary before the collision.

v
4.9 m/s 3.5 m/s

A B A B
0.018 kg 0.018 kg
0.265 kg 0.265 kg

Before collision After collision

(a) When the balls collide, ball B applies a force on ball A, which causes the velocity

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

of ball A to change.
Ball A also applies a force on ball B during the collision.
Describe how the force applied on ball A compares with the force applied on
ball B during the collision.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Calculate the momentum of ball A before the collision.

(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

momentum of ball A before collision = ............................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg m / s

12
*P73430A01224* 
(c) Show that the velocity, v, of ball B after the collision is about 0.6 m / s.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(d) A collision is considered elastic if the total kinetic energy before the collision is
equal to the total kinetic energy after the collision.
Using data from the diagram, deduce whether this collision is elastic.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 12 marks)

13
 *P73430A01324* Turn over
6 This question is about generating electricity from renewable energy resources.
(a) Photograph 1 shows a solar farm in the United Kingdom and photograph 2 shows
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

a geothermal power station in Iceland.

Photograph 1 Photograph 2
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of generating electricity using solar

power and geothermal resources.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
 *P73430A01524* Turn over
(b) A student investigates how the amount of light affects the output voltage of a
solar cell.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Photograph 3 shows how the student sets up their equipment.

lamp
solar cell

ruler

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

voltmeter

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Photograph 3

(i) The student varies the distance between the solar cell and the lamp and
measures the output voltage of the solar cell at each distance.
The student’s results are shown below.

5 cm, 0.45 V 14 cm, 0.06 V

8 cm, 0.18 V 17 cm, 0.04 V

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11 cm, 0.10 V 20 cm, 0.03 V

16
*P73430A01624* 
Draw a table showing the student’s results.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Give a control variable for the student’s investigation.

(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) The student states that the solar cell could be used as a power source for
the lamp.
They suggest that this would work if
• the solar cell is connected directly to the lamp
• the light from the lamp is used to produce the output power from the
solar cell
Explain, with reference to the principle of conservation of energy, why the
student’s suggestion would not work.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 10 marks)

17
 *P73430A01724* Turn over
7 The diagram shows two students doing an experiment to measure the speed of
sound in air.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
wall
students

100 m

This is their method.

• both students stand 100 m away from a large flat wall
• student A makes a sound by hitting two blocks of wood together

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

• the sound waves travel to the wall and reflect back to the students as an echo
• student A hits the blocks together again when the echo is heard
• student A continues to hit the blocks together every time an echo is heard
• student B starts a timer when the blocks are hit together and stops the timer
when the blocks have been hit together 20 more times
(a) Give a reason why the students do not stand nearer to the wall.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The students repeat their method five times.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The table shows the students’ results.

Time between starting and stopping timer in seconds

test 1 test 2 test 3 test 4 test 5 mean

11.80 11.18 11.76 11.75 11.72

18
*P73430A01824* 
(i) The students decide that one of their tests shows an anomalous result.
Circle the anomalous result in the table.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)
(ii) Suggest a reason for the anomalous result.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Calculate the mean time between starting and stopping the timer.
Give your answer to a suitable number of decimal places.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

mean time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(iv) The speed of sound in air can be calculated using the formula

distance travelled
speed =
time taken

Use the students’ results to calculate a value for the speed of sound in air.
(3)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

speed of sound = ....................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m / s

(Total for Question 7 = 9 marks)

19
 *P73430A01924* Turn over
8 The diagram shows a machine that can be used to measure the speed of
fast-moving protons.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
proton

detector

negative
plate
force
proton

path of

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

proton
magnetic
field

(a) At the start, the proton is attracted towards a negatively charged plate.
(i) Give a reason why the proton is attracted to the negatively charged plate.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

20
*P73430A02024* 
(ii) The proton accelerates at 1.90 × 1011 m / s2 from rest to a speed of
1.38 × 105 m / s.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Show that the time taken for this acceleration is about 7 × 10–7 s.
(3)

(b) The proton passes through a hole in the negatively charged plate and enters an
area where there is a magnetic field.
The magnetic field exerts a force on the proton, as shown in the diagram.
This force causes the proton to follow a circular path without changing speed.
(i) Give the direction of the magnetic field.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) Suggest how increasing the strength of the magnetic field will affect the
proton when it is moving in the magnetic field.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 7 marks)

21
 *P73430A02124* Turn over
9 An oscilloscope can be used to determine the frequency of a sound wave.
(a) Give the name of the piece of apparatus that must be connected to the

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
oscilloscope to detect the sound wave.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The diagram shows the screen of the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope settings.

oscilloscope settings:
y direction: 1 square = 2 V
x direction: 1 square = 0.001 s

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

A sound wave of frequency 250 Hz is detected.
The sound wave produces a trace on the oscilloscope of amplitude 4 V.
Complete the diagram by drawing the trace of this sound wave on the
oscilloscope screen.
(5)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

22
*P73430A02224* 
(c) The graph shows how the wavelength of sound waves in air varies with
their frequency.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

4.0

3.0

Wavelength
2.0
in m

1.0

0
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

0 200 400 600 800

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Frequency in Hz

If wavelength and frequency are inversely proportional, then

wavelength × frequency = constant

Using the graph, evaluate whether the wavelength of sound waves in air is
inversely proportional to their frequency.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 9 = 9 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
 *P73430A02324*
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Friday 14 June 2024
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

F:1/1/1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P73430A

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P73430A 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power V p I p = Vs I s

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P73430A

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Monday 16 June 2025
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
•• Use black ink or ball‑point pen.
If pencil is used for diagrams/sketches/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
•• The total mark for this paper is 70.
The marks for each question are shown in brackets
– use this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

Turn over

You may find the following formulae useful.

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred E
power = P=
time taken t
2π × orbital radius 2×π×r
orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P78955A0232* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box .

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
If you change your mind about an answer, put a line through the box
and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 A student plays a game using a single dice.
The student decides to determine the density of the dice by measuring its mass
and volume.

(a) Describe how the student could accurately measure the mass of the dice.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The dice is not a regular shape.

The student decides to measure the volume of the dice using a
displacement method.
The student places the dice into a measuring cylinder containing water.

4
*P78955A0432* 
The diagram shows the water in the measuring cylinder before and after the dice
is fully submerged.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

50 50

40 40

30 30

20 20

10 10

before after

(i) The measuring cylinder gives volume in units of cm3.

Using the diagram, determine the volume of the dice.
(2)

volume = ..................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3

(ii) The dice has a mass of 9.2 g.
Calculate the density of the dice using the formula

mass
density =
volume
Give a suitable unit.
(3)

density = .............................................................. unit ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 7 marks)

5
 *P78955A0532* Turn over
2 This question is about sound waves.
(a) Which range of frequencies of sound waves can be heard by humans?

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(1)
A 2 Hz to 20 000 Hz

B 2 Hz to 200 000 Hz

C 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz

D 20 Hz to 200 000 Hz

(b) The table gives some statements about sound waves.

Complete the table by placing a tick () next to each correct statement.
(2)

Statement Correct ()

sound waves are longitudinal

sound waves can travel through a vacuum

sound waves are part of the electromagnetic spectrum

sound waves can be reflected and refracted

(c) An oscilloscope can be used to display a sound wave.

(i) Give the name of the variable that is measured on the x‑axis of the
oscilloscope screen.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P78955A0632* 
(ii) The diagram shows the trace on an oscilloscope screen when a sound wave
is detected.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

On the screen, draw the trace for a quieter sound wave with a
lower frequency.
(2)
(Total for Question 2 = 6 marks)

7
 *P78955A0732* Turn over
3 The photograph shows a camper van with a solar panel on its roof. The solar panel is
made from lots of solar cells connected together.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(Source: © kostasgr / Shutterstock)

The solar panel is connected to a battery. The solar panel receives energy from the
Sun to charge the battery.
(a) Describe how energy is transferred from the Sun’s energy store to the battery’s
energy store.
(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The petrol engine can also be used to charge the battery of the camper van.
Give an advantage of using the solar panel instead of the petrol engine to charge
the battery.
Do not refer to cost in your answer.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P78955A0832* 
(c) The surface of the solar panel is black.
Explain why black is a suitable colour for the solar panel.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(d) The solar panel can charge the battery in the camper van with a maximum
current of 15 A.
Calculate the minimum time to transfer 360 000 C of charge through the battery.
Use the formula

charge transferred = current × time

(3)

minimum time = ............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s

(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

9
 *P78955A0932* Turn over
4 The photograph shows a mechanism that can be used to open a gate.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

11
 *P78955A01132* Turn over
The diagram shows the gate mechanism when the handle is being pulled to the right.

handle

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
force F

bolt

70 cm

22 cm

spring
pivot

The bolt is connected to the handle. When the handle is pulled to the right, the bolt
also moves to the right and the gate can be opened.
The spring is compressed when the bolt moves to the right. When the handle is
released, the spring pushes the bolt back to its original position.

12
*P78955A01232* 
(a) When the handle is pulled to the right, the spring applies a force on the handle to
the left.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The vertical distance between the spring and the pivot point of the handle is 22 cm.
The force from the spring is 5.2 N.
(i) Show that the force from the spring produces a moment of approximately 1 Nm.
(3)

(ii) State what is meant by the term principle of moments.

(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(iii) Force F acts on the handle to keep the handle stationary so that the gate can
be opened.
Force F acts at a vertical distance of 70 cm from the pivot point of the handle.
Calculate the magnitude of force F.
(3)

magnitude of force F = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

13
 *P78955A01332* Turn over
(b) Give two changes to this gate mechanism that would make it easier to open
the gate.
(2)

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
1 ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... ................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 4 = 9 marks)

14
*P78955A01432* 
5 A student uses this apparatus to investigate static electricity.
The positively charged ball is suspended vertically on a long length of string.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

not to scale

string

positively
charged ball

Diagram 1

(a) The ball is made of a material that is a good electrical conductor.

Name a material that is a good electrical conductor.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain, in terms of the movement of charged particles, how the ball has become
positively charged.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15
 *P78955A01532* Turn over
(c) The student places a centimetre scale behind the length of string.
The string lines up with the 5.0 cm mark on the scale when the ball is in its resting

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
position, as shown in diagram 2.

string

centimetre scale

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

positively
charged ball

Diagram 2

16
*P78955A01632* 
The student brings a negatively charged polythene rod near to the right side of
the ball.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

The ball moves, as shown in diagram 3.

string

centimetre scale

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

negatively charged polythene rod

positively charged ball

Diagram 3

(i) Explain how the movement of the ball shows that the charge on the
polythene rod is negative.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) In diagram 3, the string lines up with the 7.2 cm mark on the scale.
The student moves the polythene rod slightly further away from the ball.
Predict a possible reading on the scale.
(1)

reading = ................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm

17
 *P78955A01732* Turn over
(d) The student extends the investigation by measuring the reading on the scale for
rods made from different materials.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
As a control variable, the student charges each rod by rubbing it with a cloth the
same number of times.
Give two other control variables for the student’s investigation.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... ................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(e) The bar chart shows the results of the student’s investigation.

10.0

7.5

Reading
on scale 5.0
in cm

2.5

0
Ebonite Glass Nylon Polythene Wood

Rod material

(i) Justify the use of a bar chart to present the student’s results.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

18
*P78955A01832* 
(ii) Deduce what can be concluded about the charge on each of the rods used in
the investigation.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Use information from the bar chart to help your answer.

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 12 marks)

19
 *P78955A01932* Turn over
6 This question is about gamma radiation.
(a) Which of these statements is correct for gamma radiation?
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(1)
A gamma radiation has a weaker penetrating ability than alpha radiation

B gamma radiation is emitted by electrons in atoms

C gamma radiation is positively charged

D gamma radiation is less ionising than alpha radiation

(b) A student uses a simulation to investigate gamma radiation.

This is the student’s method.
• place a Geiger‑Muller (GM) tube a distance of 6 cm from a source of
gamma radiation
• measure the count for a time of 10 seconds
• move the GM tube further away from the source and measure the
count again.
The student measures the count three times for each distance.
(i) Give a reason why the student takes repeat readings.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21
 *P78955A02132* Turn over
(ii) The graph shows the student’s results.

14 000

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
12 000

10 000

8000
Mean
count
6000

4000

2000

0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Distance in cm

22
*P78955A02232* 
The student claims that the data obeys the formula

count × distance2 = constant

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Evaluate the student’s claim.

(3)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 5 marks)

23
 *P78955A02332* Turn over
7 This question is about transformers.
(a) The diagram shows a step‑down transformer.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
primary coil secondary coil

230 V output

The table gives some data for the step‑down transformer.

Input (primary) voltage 230 V

Input (primary) current 1.3 A

Output (secondary) current 4.0 A

Number of turns on primary coil 1000

Number of turns on secondary coil 300

24
*P78955A02432* 
(i) State the formula linking input (primary) voltage, output (secondary) voltage
and the turns ratio for a transformer.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Use data from the table to calculate the output (secondary) voltage of
the transformer.
(3)

output (secondary) voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(iii) This transformer is not 100% efficient.
The efficiency of a transformer can be calculated using the formula

useful output power

efficiency = × 100%
total input power

Calculate the efficiency of the transformer.

(5)

efficiency = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . %

25
 *P78955A02532* Turn over
(b) Explain how transformers are used in the efficient, large‑scale transmission of
electrical energy.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
You may draw a diagram to help your answer.
(5)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 7 = 14 marks)

26
*P78955A02632* 
8 This question is about cosmology.
(a) Give two pieces of evidence that support the Big Bang theory.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................... ................................................................................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) The galaxy NGC 300 is moving away from the Earth at a speed of 1.44 × 105 m/s.
Hydrogen atoms in NGC 300 emit light with a reference wavelength of
4.3405 × 10−7 m.
Calculate the wavelength of this light when it is detected at Earth.
Give your answer to five significant figures.
[speed of light in a vacuum, c = 3.00 × 108 m/s]
(4)

wavelength = ................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m

28
*P78955A02832* 
(c) Another galaxy, Centaurus A, is much further away from the Earth than NGC 300.
Explain how the wavelength of light detected from hydrogen atoms in
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Centaurus A is different from the wavelength of light detected from hydrogen

atoms in NGC 300.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 8 = 8 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

29
 *P78955A02932*
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Monday 16 June 2025
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2P
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2P

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

Y:1/1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P78955A

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P78955A 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power Vp Ip = Vs Is

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P78955A

Please check the examination details below before entering your candidate information
Candidate surname Other names

Centre Number Candidate Number

Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)

Monday 16 June 2025
Morning (Time: 1 hour 15 minutes) Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics  

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

You must have: Total Marks

Ruler, calculator, Equation Booklet (enclosed)

Instructions
•• Use black ink or ball-point pen.
If pencil is used for diagrams/graphs it must be dark (HB or B).
• Fill in the boxes at the top of this page with your name,
centre number and candidate number.
•• Answer all questions.
Answer the questions in the spaces provided
– there may be more space than you need.
• Show all the steps in any calculations and state the units.
Information
• The total mark for this paper is 70.
• – usemarks
The for each question are shown in brackets
this as a guide as to how much time to spend on each question.

You may find the following formulae useful.

1 1
frequency = f=
time period T
work done W
power = P=
time taken t
energy transferred E
power = P=
time taken t

2π × orbital radius 2×π×r

orbital speed = v=
time period T

(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)

v2 = u2 + (2 × a × s)

pressure × volume = constant p1 × V1 = p2 × V2

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

change in momentum ( mv − mu )
force = F=
time taken t

change of wavelength velocity of a galaxy λ − λ0 Δ λ v

= = =
wavelength speed of light λ0 λ0 c

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

Where necessary, assume the acceleration of free fall, g = 10 m/s2.

2
*P75829A0224* 
Answer ALL questions.
Some questions must be answered with a cross in a box . If you change your mind about an

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
answer, put a line through the box and then mark your new answer with a cross .
1 A flour mill is a factory where flour is produced.
The photograph shows some flour moving through metal channels in the flour mill.

flour

metal channels

(a) The flour particles can become charged as they move through the
metal channels.
(i) Explain how the flour particles can become charged.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........................................................................................................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The charged flour particles move away from each other as they fall from the
end of each channel.
Complete the passage by writing a suitable word or words in each
blank space.
(2)
Flour particles move away from each other because they have
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....................... charges. This causes the flour particles

to exert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................... forces on each other.

4
*P75829A0424* 
(b) The dust created by producing flour in a flour mill is dangerous because the dust
is flammable. This creates a risk of an explosion.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Explain why connecting the metal channels to earth reduces the risk of an
explosion in a flour mill.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 1 = 6 marks)

5
 *P75829A0524* Turn over
2 Uranium‑239 is an isotope of the element uranium.
(a) State what is meant by the term isotopes.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Uranium‑239 can be represented using the symbol

239
92 U
Protons are one type of particle found in the nucleus of an atom.
(i) How many protons are in the nucleus of an atom of uranium‑239?
(1)
A 92

B 147

C 239

D 331

(ii) Give the name of the other particle found in the nucleus of an atom of
uranium‑239.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6
*P75829A0624* 
(c) Uranium‑239 is radioactive and decays by beta emission.
Uranium‑239 has a half‑life of 23 minutes.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(i) A sample of uranium‑239 has an initial mass of 60 g.

Calculate the mass of uranium‑239 remaining after 46 minutes.
(2)

mass = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g
(ii) When uranium‑239 undergoes beta decay, an isotope of the element
neptunium, Np, is produced.
Which of these is the correct symbol for the neptunium nucleus produced in
the beta decay of uranium‑239?
(1)
239
A 92Np
240
B 92Np
239
C 93Np
240
D 93Np

(Total for Question 2 = 7 marks)

7
 *P75829A0724* Turn over
3 The photograph shows the tidal power station across the estuary of the river Rance
in France.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(Source: © Francois BOIZOT/Shutterstock)

The diagram shows a simplified view of the tidal power station.

tidal barrier
river

sea
water trapped at high tide
water at low tide

turbine shaft

At high tide, water is trapped behind the tidal barrier.

At low tide, the trapped water is released through the turbine shaft.
This causes a turbine to spin, which generates electricity.
(a) Give two advantages of generating electricity using tidal power.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8
*P75829A0824* 
(b) Give two disadvantages of generating electricity using tidal power.
(2)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(c) At low tide, water flows through the turbine shaft.

As the height of the trapped water in the river decreases, water falls through a
height of 8.0 m to reach the turbine shaft.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the gravitational store of the water
when 1.0 kg of water flows through the turbine shaft.
Use the formula

change in gravitational potential energy = mass × g × height

(2)

energy transferred = ............................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J

(ii) The tidal power station has a maximum power output of 240 000 kW when
water falls through a height of 8.0 m.
Calculate the mass of water flowing through the turbine shaft in 1 second
when the power station is operating at maximum power.
Assume the power station is 100% efficient.
(3)

mass of water = ................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg

(Total for Question 3 = 9 marks)

9
 *P75829A0924* Turn over
4 This question is about transformers.
(a) Describe the structure of a step‑up transformer.

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) A step‑up transformer has an input voltage of 230 V and an input current of 4.5 A.
The output current of the transformer is 0.21 A.
(i) State the formula linking input power and output power for a transformer that
is 100% efficient.
(1)

(ii) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer.

(3)

output voltage = .............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V

(Total for Question 4 = 7 marks)

10
*P75829A01024* 
5 A tennis ball is dropped from a height above the ground.
(a) Diagram 1 shows the tennis ball at the instant it is released.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Diagram 1

On diagram 1, draw a labelled arrow to show the force acting on the tennis ball at
the instant it is released.
(2)
(b) Diagram 2 shows the tennis ball at the instant it hits the ground.

tennis ball

ground

Diagram 2

12
*P75829A01224* 
Just before hitting the ground, the tennis ball is moving downwards at a velocity
of 2.5 m/s.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

Just after hitting the ground, the tennis ball is moving upwards at a speed
of 1.9 m/s.
(i) The mass of the tennis ball is 0.057 kg.
Calculate the change in momentum of the tennis ball when it hits the ground.
Give the unit.
(4)

change in momentum = .............................................................. unit = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(ii) The ball is in contact with the ground for a time of 6.0 ms.
Calculate the force exerted on the ball by the ground.
Give the direction of this force.
(3)

force = ............................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N

direction = ......................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13
 *P75829A01324* Turn over
(c) The coefficient of restitution can be used to determine how high a ball will
bounce. The higher the value of the coefficient of restitution, the higher the ball
will bounce.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
Diagram 3 shows a ball being dropped from a height (h1) above the ground.
The ball hits the ground and bounces.
At the top of its bounce, the ball reaches a height (h2) above the ground.

drop position

position at top of
bounce

ground

Diagram 3

The coefficient of restitution can be determined using the formula

h2
coefficient of restitution =
h1

A student decides to do an investigation to compare the coefficient of restitution

for different types of ball.
Design a method for the student’s investigation.
Your answer should include details of
• the variables in the investigation
• how to obtain accurate measurements
• how to obtain reliable results
You may add to diagram 3 or draw an additional diagram to help your answer.
(6)

14
*P75829A01424* 
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 5 = 15 marks)

15
 *P75829A01524* Turn over
6 This question is about cosmic microwave background radiation (CMBR) and
the Big Bang.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
(a) CMBR has a mean frequency of 1.6 × 1011 Hz.
(i) State the formula linking wave speed, frequency and wavelength.
(1)

(ii) Show that the mean wavelength of CMBR is about 2 mm.

[speed of light = 3.0 × 108 m/s]
(3)

(b) CMBR was first released after the Big Bang.

When CMBR was first released it had a wavelength of about 9 × 10–5 mm, but now
it has a wavelength of about 2 mm.
Using this information, explain how CMBR supports the Big Bang theory.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16
*P75829A01624* 
(c) Explain how the cosmological red‑shift of galaxies also supports the
Big Bang theory.
(4)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Total for Question 6 = 10 marks)

17
 *P75829A01724* Turn over
7 The photograph shows a cup that is designed to keep a drink hot.

shiny silver-coloured surface

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

plastic lid

(a) The inside surface of the cup is shiny and silver‑coloured.

Explain how the shiny silver‑coloured surface helps to keep a drink hot.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Explain why a drink in the cup will stay hot for longer when the lid is placed on
the cup.
(2)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
 *P75829A01924* Turn over
(c) A student investigates how the temperature of a drink in the cup varies with time.
This is the student’s method.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
• pour some hot water into the cup and place the lid on the cup
• wait for the water to cool to 80 °C and then start a stopwatch
• measure the temperature of the water in the cup every 10 minutes
The graph shows the student’s results.

Temperature
in C 40

0
0 50 100 150 200 250
Time in minutes

20
*P75829A02024* 
(i) On the graph, draw a tangent to the curve when the temperature is 40 °C.
(1)
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

(ii) Calculate the gradient of the tangent to find the rate of temperature change
of the water when the temperature is 40 °C.
Give your answer in °C / minute.
(3)

rate of temperature change = ....................................................... . . . . . . . °C / minute

(iii) The student is working in a laboratory with a room temperature of 20 °C.
Draw a line on the graph to show how the temperature of the water in the
cup would change if there was no lid on the cup.
(2)
(Total for Question 7 = 10 marks)

21
 *P75829A02124* Turn over
8 A high‑frequency sound wave is detected by a microphone and displayed on
an oscilloscope.

DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
The diagram shows the oscilloscope screen when the sound wave is detected. It also
shows the oscilloscope settings.

oscilloscope settings:
x direction: 1 square = 20 × 10−6 s
y direction: 1 square = 10 mV

(a) Give the maximum frequency of sound that can be heard by humans.
(1)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(b) Determine if the sound wave displayed on the oscilloscope could be heard
by humans.
(4)

................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................................................................................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22
*P75829A02224* 
(c) A student changes the settings of the oscilloscope to alter the displayed wave in
these two ways.
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA
DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA DO NOT WRITE IN THIS AREA

• increase the amplitude of the wave

• only display one time period of the wave on the screen
The table shows some possible settings for the oscilloscope.
Which row of the table gives the student’s new oscilloscope settings?
(1)

x direction setting / y direction setting /

seconds per square mV per square
A 10 × 10–6 5

B 10 × 10–6 20

C 40 × 10–6 5

D 40 × 10–6 20

(Total for Question 8 = 6 marks)

TOTAL FOR PAPER = 70 MARKS

23
 *P75829A02324*
Pearson Edexcel International GCSE (9–1)
Monday 16 June 2025
Paper
reference 4PH1/2PR
Physics
 

UNIT: 4PH1
PAPER: 2PR

Equation Booklet
Do not return this Booklet with the question paper.

Turn over

Y:1/1/1/1/
These equations may be required for both International GCSE Physics (4PH1) and
International GCSE Combined Science (4SD0) papers.

1. Forces and Motion

distance moved
average speed =
time taken

acceleration = change in velocity a

v u
time taken t
(final speed)2 = (initial speed)2 + (2 × acceleration × distance moved)
v2 u 2 2 a s

force = mass × acceleration F=m×a

weight = mass × gravitational field strength W=m×g

2. Electricity

power = current × voltage P=I×V

energy transferred = current × voltage × time E=I×V×t

voltage = current × resistance V=I×R

charge = current × time Q=I×t

energy transferred = charge × voltage E=Q×V

3. Waves

wave speed = frequency × wavelength v=f×λ

1 1
frequency = f =
time period T

sin angle of incidence sin i

refractive index = n=
sin angle of refraction sin r

1 1
sin critical angle sin c =
refractive index n

2 P75829A

4. Energy resources and energy transfers

useful energy output

efficiency = ×100%
total energy output

work done = force × distance moved W=F×d

gravitational potential energy = mass × gravitational field strength × height

GPE = m × g × h

1 1
kinetic energy = × mass × speed2 KE m v 2
2 2

work done W
power = P=
time taken t

5. Solids, liquids and gases

mass m
density =
volume V

force F
pressure = p=
area A
pressure difference = height × density × gravitational field strength
p=h×ρ×g

pressure p1 p2
= constant =
temperature T1 T2

pressure × volume = constant p 1 × V1 = p 2 × V2

8. Astrophysics

2 orbital radius 2 r

orbital speed = v
time period T

The equations on the following page will only be required for International GCSE Physics.

P75829A 3
 Turn over
These additional equations may be required in International GCSE Physics papers 2P
and 2PR.

1. Forces and Motion

momentum = mass × velocity p=m×v

force =
change in momentum
F
mv mu
time taken t

moment = force × perpendicular distance from the pivot

5. Solids, liquids and gases

change in thermal energy = mass × specific heat capacity × change in temperature

ΔQ = m × c × ΔT

6. Magnetism and electromagnetism

relationship between input and output voltages for a transformer

input (primary) voltage primary turns
=
output (secondary) voltage secondary turns

input power = output power Vp Ip = Vs Is

for 100% efficiency

8. Astrophysics

change in wavelength velocity of a galaxy 0 v

=
reference wavelength speed of light 0 0 c

END OF EQUATION LIST

4 P75829A


4PH0 2P Que 20190118
No ratings yet
4PH0 2P Que 20190118
20 pages
2P Jan 19
No ratings yet
2P Jan 19
22 pages
4PH0 2P Que 20190118
No ratings yet
4PH0 2P Que 20190118
20 pages
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Paper
20 pages
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Paper
20 pages
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
20 pages
Physics Paper 4: Double Award Exam
100% (1)
Physics Paper 4: Double Award Exam
32 pages
Edexcel IGCSE Physics Exam Paper 1P
No ratings yet
Edexcel IGCSE Physics Exam Paper 1P
32 pages
4PH0 1P Que 20180524
No ratings yet
4PH0 1P Que 20180524
32 pages
Edexcel Level 3 GCE Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel Level 3 GCE Physics Exam Paper
32 pages
Edexcel Level 3 Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel Level 3 Physics Exam Paper
32 pages
GCSE Physics Paper 2 Higher Tier Exam
No ratings yet
GCSE Physics Paper 2 Higher Tier Exam
28 pages
Physics Exam Instructions and Formulae
No ratings yet
Physics Exam Instructions and Formulae
31 pages
Edexcel Physics Exam Paper P75952A
No ratings yet
Edexcel Physics Exam Paper P75952A
36 pages
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
20 pages
4PH1 2P Que 20200305
100% (6)
4PH1 2P Que 20200305
20 pages
Physics: Unit: 4PH0 Science (Double Award) 4SC0 Paper: 1PR
No ratings yet
Physics: Unit: 4PH0 Science (Double Award) 4SC0 Paper: 1PR
36 pages
Physics AS Level Exam Paper 2016
No ratings yet
Physics AS Level Exam Paper 2016
24 pages
4PH1 1PR Que 20190523
No ratings yet
4PH1 1PR Que 20190523
36 pages
Fatheen Model Exam 10
No ratings yet
Fatheen Model Exam 10
27 pages
Mock Exam Question Paper
No ratings yet
Mock Exam Question Paper
59 pages
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Paper 2P
No ratings yet
Edexcel International GCSE Physics Paper 2P
20 pages
A Level Physics Jun 18 Questionpaper4
No ratings yet
A Level Physics Jun 18 Questionpaper4
32 pages
Questionpaper Unit1 (6PH01) June2017
No ratings yet
Questionpaper Unit1 (6PH01) June2017
24 pages
Nov 25 P2
No ratings yet
Nov 25 P2
24 pages
IGCSE Physics Exam Paper 4 Guide
No ratings yet
IGCSE Physics Exam Paper 4 Guide
13 pages
2017 Edexcel Physics AS Exam Paper
No ratings yet
2017 Edexcel Physics AS Exam Paper
24 pages
June 2019 (Ial) QP
No ratings yet
June 2019 (Ial) QP
28 pages
Physics Past Paper
No ratings yet
Physics Past Paper
14 pages
Physics Exam Instructions and Questions
No ratings yet
Physics Exam Instructions and Questions
23 pages
Physics Exam Instructions and Questions
No ratings yet
Physics Exam Instructions and Questions
28 pages
wph11 01 Que 20190515
No ratings yet
wph11 01 Que 20190515
28 pages
Physics Past Paper 1
No ratings yet
Physics Past Paper 1
10 pages
Jan 2017 1P Que 20170112 IGCSE Edexcel Physics
No ratings yet
Jan 2017 1P Que 20170112 IGCSE Edexcel Physics
28 pages
AS Physics Mock Exam Paper 01
No ratings yet
AS Physics Mock Exam Paper 01
24 pages
Modelling Set A Ocr Physics Mock Year 12
No ratings yet
Modelling Set A Ocr Physics Mock Year 12
24 pages
International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
36 pages
IGCSE Physics Summer Homework Guide
No ratings yet
IGCSE Physics Summer Homework Guide
19 pages
IGCSE Physics-Past Paper - Jan 20 Paper 2P (QP)
No ratings yet
IGCSE Physics-Past Paper - Jan 20 Paper 2P (QP)
20 pages
4ph1 1p Que 20240526 Unlocked
No ratings yet
4ph1 1p Que 20240526 Unlocked
36 pages
Edexcel IGCSE Physics Nov 2024 Paper
No ratings yet
Edexcel IGCSE Physics Nov 2024 Paper
79 pages
Y9 Physics Mock Exam Paper 2020
No ratings yet
Y9 Physics Mock Exam Paper 2020
15 pages
Grade 8 Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
Grade 8 Physics Exam Paper
20 pages
May 2019 Physics Exam Paper 1PR
No ratings yet
May 2019 Physics Exam Paper 1PR
36 pages
IasPHy. p1 May 2019
No ratings yet
IasPHy. p1 May 2019
14 pages
June 2019 (IAL) QP - Unit 1 Edexcel Physics A-Level
No ratings yet
June 2019 (IAL) QP - Unit 1 Edexcel Physics A-Level
28 pages
4PH0 2P Que 20180616
No ratings yet
4PH0 2P Que 20180616
20 pages
Edexcel Physics Paper 1 Mark Scheme
100% (1)
Edexcel Physics Paper 1 Mark Scheme
28 pages
Igcse Physics p1 2016 2021 v2
No ratings yet
Igcse Physics p1 2016 2021 v2
514 pages
O Level Physics Exam Paper Sample
No ratings yet
O Level Physics Exam Paper Sample
25 pages
Physics Homework on Pressure and Energy
No ratings yet
Physics Homework on Pressure and Energy
35 pages
A-level Physics Paper 2 Exam Guide
No ratings yet
A-level Physics Paper 2 Exam Guide
36 pages
International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
No ratings yet
International GCSE Physics Exam Paper
28 pages
International GCSE Physics Exam Instructions
No ratings yet
International GCSE Physics Exam Instructions
37 pages
IG Physics - Question Paper 2P (Jun 2025)
No ratings yet
IG Physics - Question Paper 2P (Jun 2025)
36 pages
January 2017 QP - Paper 1P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
No ratings yet
January 2017 QP - Paper 1P Edexcel Physics IGCSE
4 pages
Edexcel GCSE Physics Exam Paper 2020
No ratings yet
Edexcel GCSE Physics Exam Paper 2020
40 pages
S5 Physics Final Exam Paper 2021
No ratings yet
S5 Physics Final Exam Paper 2021
22 pages
Chapter III
No ratings yet
Chapter III
52 pages
Mathematical Physics: Vectors & Analysis
No ratings yet
Mathematical Physics: Vectors & Analysis
4 pages
High-Pressure Multistage Pump Specs
No ratings yet
High-Pressure Multistage Pump Specs
1 page
Advancements in Machining Processes
100% (2)
Advancements in Machining Processes
10 pages
Maglev Trains: Technology and Benefits
No ratings yet
Maglev Trains: Technology and Benefits
29 pages
Ammonia Production from Hydrogen and Nitrogen
No ratings yet
Ammonia Production from Hydrogen and Nitrogen
12 pages
Gen Chem 1 Module 2 2nd Edition 2021
No ratings yet
Gen Chem 1 Module 2 2nd Edition 2021
25 pages
ATEX Hazardous Area Sounders
No ratings yet
ATEX Hazardous Area Sounders
2 pages
Properties and Applications of Ultrasonics
No ratings yet
Properties and Applications of Ultrasonics
76 pages
Moments and Generating Functions in Probability
No ratings yet
Moments and Generating Functions in Probability
85 pages
Electrons in Periodic Potentials
No ratings yet
Electrons in Periodic Potentials
33 pages
Geometric Inequalities Overview
No ratings yet
Geometric Inequalities Overview
8 pages
Equipment and Piping 2
No ratings yet
Equipment and Piping 2
49 pages
ME 322: Manufacturing Processes I Overview
100% (1)
ME 322: Manufacturing Processes I Overview
2 pages
Heat Exchanger Calculations Tutorial
No ratings yet
Heat Exchanger Calculations Tutorial
3 pages
Enhanced AFM Sensitivity via FM Detection
No ratings yet
Enhanced AFM Sensitivity via FM Detection
7 pages
Fourier Series Analysis and Properties
No ratings yet
Fourier Series Analysis and Properties
13 pages
Offshore Pipeline Repair Techniques
100% (2)
Offshore Pipeline Repair Techniques
26 pages
Beam and Frame Analysis Fundamentals
No ratings yet
Beam and Frame Analysis Fundamentals
70 pages
Economical Epoxy for Transportation Use
No ratings yet
Economical Epoxy for Transportation Use
28 pages
Pta 6169 5364954 83494
No ratings yet
Pta 6169 5364954 83494
53 pages
Intro to Math for Economics: Chapter 1
No ratings yet
Intro to Math for Economics: Chapter 1
21 pages
Coordination Insertion Mechanism of Ring Opening Polymerization of Lactide Catalyzed by Stannous Octoate
No ratings yet
Coordination Insertion Mechanism of Ring Opening Polymerization of Lactide Catalyzed by Stannous Octoate
12 pages
Bearing and Distance Computations Guide
No ratings yet
Bearing and Distance Computations Guide
5 pages
Grade 10 Physics Worksheet on Optics
No ratings yet
Grade 10 Physics Worksheet on Optics
4 pages
CLCP008C Air Handling Unit Specs
No ratings yet
CLCP008C Air Handling Unit Specs
12 pages
SRMU Workshop Practices Practical Guide
No ratings yet
SRMU Workshop Practices Practical Guide
44 pages
BPCL Junior Executive Application Details
No ratings yet
BPCL Junior Executive Application Details
5 pages
S2T 2.5 Modular Terminal Block Guide
No ratings yet
S2T 2.5 Modular Terminal Block Guide
3 pages
Chemical Kinetics: Reaction Rates Explained
No ratings yet
Chemical Kinetics: Reaction Rates Explained
40 pages